1
Download Canon elura20 Specifications
Transcript
Video Product ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A No. D17-6512 D17-6522 Digital Video Camera NTSC Canon Inc. Digital Imaging Products Service Dept. c CANON INC. 2001 First Edition : Sep. 2001 First Print : Sep. 2001 CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTENTS 1. Product Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1 2. Product Features ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-1 2-1 Comparative List for Functions and Performance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3 3. Performance / Functions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6 4. System Charts --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13 5. Viewfinder/ LCD Display Internal Display List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14 5-1 Camera Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14 5-2 VCR Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-18 5-3 Card Recording Mode (MC Model Only) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-22 5-4 Card Play Mode (MC Model only) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-26 5-5 Menu Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-28 5-6 Card Mix Screen Displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-35 5-7 Warning Display ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-40 6. Data Backup ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-42 6-1 Main Power Supply Backup -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-42 6-2 Backup by the Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Button Type Lithium Primary Battery) ---------------- 1-42 6-3 Backup Conditions Using Switch Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-43 6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-43 6-3-2 Other Power Switch Positions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-44 6-3-3 Switching the Camera Mode/Switching the Program AE Mode --------------------------------------------------- 1-45 7. Others ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46 7-1 Green Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46 7-2 On-Screen ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46 7-3 Headphone (with Docking Unit DU-300 Connected), Speaker --------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46 7-4 Battery Level display, Warning Displays and (Low-Power) Power Shutoff ------------------------------------------------- 1-47 7-5 System Data Display ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-47 7-6 Data Code display -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-47 7-7 MP Tape Capability ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-47 7-8 Warning Buzzer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-47 7-9 Using Analog Line, DV Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-48 7-10 VIdeo ID1 Detection/Output Capability ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-48 7-11 Closed Caption Detection/Output ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-49 7-12 Audio Dubbing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-49 7-12-1 Tape Usable for Audio Dubbing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-49 7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-49 7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-49 7-13 AV Insert ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50 7-13-1 Tape Usable for AV Insert ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50 7-13-2 AV Insert Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50 7-14 Multi-Dial ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50 7-15 LCD Panel/CVF (Color ViewFinder) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51 7-15-1 Camera Mode/Camera Recording Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51 7-15-2 VCR Mode/Card Play Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51 7-16 Memory Card System -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51 7-16-1 Card Recording (Card Recording of Still Images) ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-51 7-16-2 Copying [ ]/[ ] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-52 7-16-3 Card Mix ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-53 7-16-4 Card Playback ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-53 7-16-5 Image Protecting Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54 7-16-6 Print Mark Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54 7-16-7 Image Erase --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54 7-16-8 Format --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55 7-16-9 Card Review -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55 7-16-10 Image Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55 7-16-11 Forward Skip for Card Playback ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-56 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 1. Product Overview Strategic product with a 3x recording mode, memory card functions and analog line input (iPAL) that are newly developed in the camcorder industries. Also, it succeeds the super compact size of the ELURA2 MC A with more sophisticated exterior design and enhances the picture quality. 2. Product Features • Compact vertical (magnesium alloy) body • 1/4-inch progressive scan 680,000-pixel CCD RGB primary color filters • 2.5-inch 200,000-Pixel LCD monitor • Digital input/output (DV jack), analog input/output AV insert function • Card still image recording, multi-media card, SD memory card capability (MC model only) • Card mix function (MC model only) • SDL mode (max. recording time 240 min. : ELP mode using 80 min. tape) • Multi-screen • 3-element microphone • Adequate accessories (New : 1 types of optical accessories, compact power supply) • User-friendly card functions (Card preview, card playback jump functions) 1-1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT External Appearance Fig. 1-1 1-2 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 2-1 Comparative List for Functions and Performance Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device) Camera Imaging(video) Image size 1/4-inch CCD ← element Number of pixels Total number of pixels : 680,000 ← Effective number of pixels : 360,000 ← System Progressive scan ← Filter RGB primary color filters ← Optical zoom ratio 10 × ← Digital zoom ratio 40 × (10 × 4) ← Focal length 3.5-35mm ← (Converted to 35mm film) 44.7-447mm ← F number F1.6-2.6 ← Zoom speed Variable ← Filter diameter 27mm ← Minimum brightness 7.5 (3.5) lux (low-light mode NTSC: 1/30 sec) ← Hand jitter compensation Electronic type ← (Full auto) ← Lens Recording function Program AE (Auto/Sports/Portrait/Spotlight/ Surf(sand)& snow/Low-light) Light metering Lower center weighted Full auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, system Portrait mode, Low light mode averaged metering Evaluation metering ← ← 128 sectors (spotlight mode, surf (sand) & snow mode) Exposure AE lock ● ← adjustment Exposure compensation ● (after AE lock) ← AE shift × ← Gain setting/Higher sensitivity × ← Backlight compensation × ← 6 steps ← Shutter speed High-speed shutter (1/60, 1/100, 1/250,1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000) Slow shutter 1 step (1/30 (Low-light, AE mode)) ← Auto iris ← Image quality Color gain adjustment × ← adjustment Color phase adjustment Aperture × ← × ← Setup adjustment × ← Auto ● ← (Custom preset) Sharpness adjustment WB Focus 16:9 Set ● (1 pc.) ← Preset Outdoors/indoors ← System TTL, 128 sectors ← Mode AF/MF ← Manual focus Multi-dial operation ← Recording system Vertical extension system ← Area marker display × ← Recording D. effect Art, black & white, sepia, mosaic ← effects D. fade White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic Multi-screen 4/9/16 screen (MC model only) ← (MC model only) × ← Zebra pattern 1-3 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device) Recording function Color bar × ← Movie Framed movie Progressive scan ← recording Self-timer 10 sec/remote control : 2 sec ← Interval timer × ← Clear scan × ← Recording system Frame recording (MC model only) ← (MC model only) Still image recording (tape) (Field recording for card mix) Recording time 6.5 sec. 6.5 sec. (ESP/ELP:approx. 8 sec.) Frame processing Progressive scan ← Still image Recording system Frame recording (MC model only) ← (MC model only) recording Recorded image size/file system 640 (H) × 480 (V) / JPEG (MC model only) (Card) Memory card ← (MC model only) Multi-media card Multi-media card, SD memory card REC search ● ← REC review ● ← Card review × ★ (MC model only) Standby SW × ← Power save(after 5-min. recording pause) Power shutoff ← Displayed character recording × ← Audio 16 bits 2 ch (48KHz) ← 12 bits 4 ch (32KHz)(No sync 4-ch recording) ● ON/OFF switch (for built-in microphone only) ← Wind cut EVF Monitor LCD Size 0.44-inch (color TFT) ← Number of pixels 113,000 pixels ← Brightness adjustment × ← Color adjustment × ← Portable × ← Size 2.5-inch ← Number of pixels 200,000 pixels ← Brightness adjustment × ← Portable ● Mirror photography capability ← VCR Playback Frame forward play Forward/reverse ← system Slow play Forward/reverse ← 2× speed play Forward/reverse ← 1× speed play Forward/reverse ← Queue/review 9.5 × speed play ← Photo search ● ← Search Date search ● ← Index search × ← D. effect Art, black & white, sepia, mosaic ← D. fade White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic ← Multi-screen 4/9/16 screen (MC model only) ← (MC model only) Date display/camera data ← Slide show ● (MC model only) ← (MC model only) Card playback jump × ★ (MC model only) Audio dubbing ● ← ● ← Play effect Data code display AV insert Digital Analog Zero set memory ● ← ● ← 1-4 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device) VCR Edit function Simple edit × ← Effects × ← Microphone input ● (DC 5V jack, DU-300 capability) ← Headphone output ● (DU-300 capability) ← DV jack ● (input/output) ← S jack ● (input/output, DU-300 capability) ← (input/output, DU-300 capability) Systems I/F(jack) input/output RCA pin (also used for VA) ← (also used for VA) LANG jack (DU-300 capability) ← World clock ● ← Character title × ← Speaker ● ← Warning buzzer ● ← Tally lamp ● AV jack Edit capability ← 1, Remote control 2 capability ← Accessory shoe × ← Video ID ● (ID1) ← Recording LP ● ← mode SDL ( E SP, E LP) × ★ Custom key × ← Index screen key × ★ (MC model only) Mix/slide show key × ★ (MC model only) DV control × ← Main unit charging × ← Backup power supply Button type lithium battery (CR-1616 type) ← Battery pack power supply Lithium battery, 400 series ← Changed from D52A/B models (★ : New functions) 1-5 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 3. Performance / Functions ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Video camcorder 1 Type 2 Recording system 2-1 Video signal recording system Sampling frequency Number of quantified bits 2-2 Audio signal recording system 2-3 Tracking 2-4 Tape speed 2-5 Head drum Drum diameter Speed Number of heads 3 Record/play times Continuous recording time BP-406 BP-412 BP-422 4 Usable video cassettes 4-1 Tape type 4-2 Tape width 4-3 Tape thickness 5 Camera 5-1 Video element 5-1-1Number of pixels 5-1-2 Filters 5-1-3 Color separation system 5-1-4 Signal configuration 5-1-5 Scan system 5-2 Optical lens 5-2-1 Nominal focal length Zoom ratio (Converted to 35mm film) 5-2-2 Nominal aperture ratio 5-2-3 Lens configuration 5-2-4 Focusing 5-2-5 Minimum focusing distance 5-2-6 Power zoom 5-2-7 5-2-8 5-2-9 5-2-10 5-2-11 5-2-12 5-2-13 Rotary 3-head helical scan azimuth recording. Personal digital DVC (SD/SDL standard). Conforms to the NTSC system (525 lines x 60 fields). Digital component recording. SD SDL Y = 13.5MHz Y = 10.125MHz R-Y, B-Y = 3.375MHz R-Y, B-Y = 3.375MHz 8bits 8bits PCM digital recording. PCM digital recording. 16-bit, 48KHz 2 channels -------12-bit, 32KHz 2 channels 32KHz 2ch (stereo 1, 2) (stereo1) 2-frequency pilot type 2-frequency pilot type Approx. 18.81mm/sec. (SP mode) Approx. 9.41mm/sec. (ESP mode) Approx. 12.56mm/sec. (LP mode) Approx. 6.28mm/sec. (ELP mode) 21.7mm 9000/1.001 rpm 3 video heads Max. 80 min. (SP mode) Max. 160 min. (ESP mode) Max. 120 min. (LP mode) Max. 240 min. (ELP mode) Approx. 55 min. (CVF), Approx 45 min. (LCD) Approx. 100 min. (CVF), Approx 80 min. (LCD) Approx. 200 min. (CVF), Approx 165 min. (LCD) Mini-DVC specifications. Evaporated metal tape. 6.35mm evaporated metal tape. 7µm 1/4 (1/4-inch) type progressive scan CCD. Total number of pixels: approx. 680,000 Effective number of pixels: approx. 360,000 RGB primary color filters. Differential read-out type. NTSC standard color video signal 525 lines x 60 fields / 30 frames 3.5mm - 35mm Optical lens: 10× Electronic zoom: 40× (10× 4 = 40) 44.7mm - 447mm 1788mm (equivalent) 1 : 1.6 (F2.6 at Tele photo-end) 10 elements, 7 groups, 2 aspherical lens elements (3 surfaces) used. Inner focus type. Manual focusing is also possible (by rotating the Multi dial). 10mm (autofocus at Wide). 1m (from the front of the lens) throughout the entire zoom range. Multi-step, variable speed power zoom. Slide lever type. The zoom speed is varied by the amount of slide lever movement. Optical zoom: approx. 2.0 sec. - approx. 21 sec. Digital zoom: approx. 3.5 sec. - approx. 24 sec. No manual zoom (no zoom ring). Focal length indication None. There is a simple zoom display in the viewfinder. Macro mechanism Wide angle end macro. Minimum macro focusing distance 10mm (from front of lens). Filter diameter 27mm, P0.5mm Accessory lenses, filter FS-27U can be used. Lens hood None. Lens cap Covering type. 1-6 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-3 Hand jitter compensation 5-3-1 Type 5-3-2 Hand jitter detection 5-4 Recording modes 5-4-1 Movie mode 5-4-2 Photo mode 5-4-3 Card recording Yes Electronic type hand jitter compensaion Angular velocity detecting method. Movie mode, photo mode (tape and card recording (card for ELURA 20 MC A only)). Normal recording and progressive scan recording. Approx. 6.5 sec. (approx, 8 sec. int the ESP mode and ELP mode) still image recording (field recording for card mix in frame record and movie mode) Lock display ( ) in the viewfinder after partially pressing the button. This display lights green when the AF lock is applied. CCD Prograssive still images can be recorded an still images on MMC (Multi-Media cards) or SD (Secure Digital) memory card by pressing the Photo button int the card recording mode. A shutter tone (pseundo) will sound at his sound at this time. Recording system JPEG. JPEG system compressin ratio (fine/standard) available. Conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system). Recording system JPEG system compensation ratio (irreversible) (fine/standard) available Conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system). Number of recordable images (for SDC-8M) Fine Approx. 50 Standard Approx. 80 The SDC-8M card supplied contains pre-recorded title images, so the above values will be smaller when this is used. The values are merely guidelines and can vary widely depending on the focal length used, the subject, the conditions, etc. 5-5 Exposure control 5-5-1 AE function Program AE 5-5-2 Light metering system Full auto mode, auto mode, sports mode, portrait mode, spotlight mode, surf (sand) & snow mode, low light mode. Below-center weighted averaging metering : Full auto Mode, Auto Mode, Sports Mode, Portrait Mode, Low Light Mode. Full frame averaged metering + 128-sector evaluation metering : Spotlight Mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow Mode. 128 sectors (16 vertical x 8 horizontal) Frame division 5-5-3 Exposure compensation function AE lock AE lock by AE shift button operation AE lock uses the Multi-dial for Exposure compensation (except in Full Auto mode). Exposure Compensation volume +/−11 steps (+/−2.75EV), 0.25 aperture stop per step. Bar indicator ( ) in the viewfinder. 5-5-4 Electronic shutter High-speed shutter Low-speed shutter 5-6 Autofocus (AF) 5-6-1 System 5-6-2 AF measurement area 5-6-3 Metering frame display 5-6-4 AF operational range 5-6-5 AF operational brightness range 5-6-6 AF mode selection Manual focus 5-7 Viewfinder 5-7-1 5-7-2 5-7-3 5-7-4 Rotation Eyepiece removal Diopter adjustment range Lens configuration Auto mode : 1/60 sec., 1/100 sec., 1/250 sec., 1/500 sec., 1/1000 sec., 1/2000 sec. Hand jitter compensation ON During flicker detection : 1/100 sec. During flicker detection : 1/120 sec. Hand jitter compensation OFF During flicker detection : 1/100 sec. 1/30 sec. (low light mode, fixed speed) TTL, video signal detection auto focus type AF. Center of screen None. 10mm - infinity (Wide); 1m - infinity (from front of lens) throughout the entire zoom range. 50 lux - 100,000 lux Continuous AF/manual focusing. AF can be turned on and off by pressing the focus button in all modes except full auto. (Pressing focus button) is displayed in the viewfinder during manual focus (AF off). 0.44-inch type, color liquid crystal display (approx. 113,000 pixels), telescoping type (pull out). Off except when the LCD monitor is stored (body side panel face) and during mirror mode. No. Yes. +1.5 to –5.5 diopters (eyepiece). 2 groups, 2 elements. 1-7 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 2.5-inch type, color liquid crystals, display approx. 200,000 pixels (228 (V) × 880 (H)). TFT active matrix drive. RGB delta array. On except when the LCD monitor is stored (body side panel face). Yes. High angle, low angle, monitoring during mirror mode. Operation mode display, simple zoom position display, battery level display, remaining tape display, time code, various warning. Color display. No display during mirror mode. 5-8 LCD panel Angle adjustment Data display Relationships to the viewfinder (CVF) Camera mode/card recording LCD panel position LCD panel *1 VCR mode/card playback CVF LCD panel CVF Panel closed (panel side of body) OFF ON OFF ON Panel closed (panel side outside) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON Panel opened Mirror (photography) mode *3 ON *2 *1 *1: ELURA20 MC A only *2: Appears in Mirror mode with menu operation. *3: Panel displays restricted to the following for Mirror mode. (Normal viewfinder and onscreen displays) The following marks are indicated in the upper left of screen . • Camera mode : “●” recording , “ ” recording pause,“ ”ejection • Card recording mode : “ ” without card , “ <<<<”with card, accessing (Mirror mode is reset in recording search and warning.) TTL, 128-sector, new white extraction type FAWB. 5-9 White balance adjustment With set/preset (outdoors: 5,600K; indoors: 3,200K) (selection from camera menu). 2,800K - 8,000K. Adjustment range 5-10 Digital feature function Fader, effects, multi-screen, card mix (MC model only) modes are provided. Fader : Coupled to the start/stop button (VCR mode button), one-time execution is possible when the fader mode is displayed (the mode display disappears when the fader ends). Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned off. Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as indicated manually. Displays continue until turned off. Card mix : The sample images supplied and images recorded on cards can be mixed and displayed with images captured with the camera. Audio-synchronized fader. Auto fade (JAPAN models: White Fade; Overseas Models: Black Fade), Wipe (Left/Right), Scroll, Mosaic Fade. Approx. 4 sec. Art, Monochrome, Sepia, Mosaic. Operated by pressing the Effects button to toggle this function ON and OFF. 5-10-1 Fader Fade time 5-10-2 Effects 5-10-3 Multi-screen Number of screens 4 (2 × 2, 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4) Operation mode Manual, fast (every 4 fields), normal (every 6 fields), slow (every 8 fields). 5-10-4 Card mix (MC model only) Mix type Card chroma key, Card luminance key, Camera chroma key Mix level adjustment 32 steps. 5-10-5 Relationship between digital features and operation mode When execution is possible in the various modes (Card record mode, card play mode. Card mix only with the MC model.) Fader Effects Multi-screen Card mix Card record mode × ○ ○ × Camera mode Still Image Movie × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *1 ○ ○ VCR mode ○ ○ ○ × Card playback mode × × × × *1: Not possible in the movie mode or low light mode (interlace). 1-8 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-11 Built-in microphone 5-11-1 Wind cut function 5-12 Additional functions 5-12-1 Time code 5-12-2 Data code Date/time Camera data 5-12-3 Assessory shoe 5-12-4 Image search function 5-12-5 Rec review function Stereo microphone (electret condenser microphone used). Stereo using on-directional microphone × 3 + electrical circuit (3-element microphone). With on/off switch (menu selection for built-in microphone only). Recording time (0:00:00 - 7:59:59) is displayed and recorded in the sub code area. There is no recording time display, but the recording date/time and camera data are recorded and can be displayed during play. Coupling range: January 1, 2001 to December 31, 2030 (initial setting: January 1, 2001). World time capability. Automatic setting to the date/time of travel destinations by selecting the destination city. Daylight saving time capability. Three display modes are available for play: date, date and time, and time (January 1, 1990 to December 31, 2089). Values such as shutter speed and aperture value are recorded (no display during recording) and can be displayed during play. None. Tape can be played (forward/reverse) during camera recording pause by operating the Rec Search button. Started by operating the Rec Check button ( ) during camera recording pause. 5-12-6 Card review function Yes (MC model only) The last image recorded on the memory card is read out by operating the REC Check button ( ) on the card recording mode. The image read out can be protected or deleted. 5-12-7 Zero set memory Yes. Tape can be forwarded or rewound continuously until the zero set memory key of the WLD75/WL-D76 is operated (The counter value is set to 0:00:00.) (Zero set is possible only during recording, not during play.) 5-12-8 Remote control ON/OFF 5-12-9 Selftimer 5-12-10 Headphone volume adjustment 6 Recorder unit 6-1 Recording functions 6-1-1 Recording format 6-1-2 Tape speed SD specifications SDL specifikations 6-1-3 DV input recording 6-1-4 Analog input recording 6-1-5 Terminal priority during recording 6-2 Insert recording 6-2-1 Insertable tape 6-3 Dubbing 6-3-1 Tapes usable 6-3-2 Dubbing signal input 6-3-3 Dubbing selection 6-4 Play functions 6-4-1 Standard play a. Video b. Audio 16-bit 12-bit 6-4-2 Special play a. Freeze frame play b. Fast forward play c. Rewind play d. Frame forward play e. Slow play f. 1× speed play g. 2× speed play h. Edit search Yes. Available in both the camera recording and the VCR modes (menu selection). 10 sec. (Approximately 2 sec. when the wireless controller WL-D75/WL-D76 is used.) Adjustment is possible using the multi-dial. Camera recording, DV input recording, analog input recording. Personal DVC (SD specifications). Approx. 18.81mm/sec. (SP mode), approx. 12.56mm/sec. (LP mode) Approx. 9.41mm/sec. (ESP mode), approx 6.28mm/sec. (ELP mode) Conforms to IEEE 1394. Records video and audio signals from a digital video camera connected with the DV cable. The S-video jack and AV mini-jack are used to recordanalog video and audio signals. DV jack > S-video jack > AV mini-jack Yes. Only tapes with SP recording can be inserted. Yes (SD specification tape only) Only tapes with 12-bit SP recording other than for audio dubbing 4-channel simultaneous recordings can be used for dubbing. Line (AV mini-jack) or microphone (external/internal) audio signals. Operate the dubbing button of the remote control in play pause status. Standard play and special play Video recorded in the SP, LP, E SP or E LP mode Sampling frequency 48KHz, 44.1KHz, 32KHz. (except for SDL specifications) Sampling frequency 32KHz. Play using stereo 1, stereo 2 or a mix of stereo 1 and 2 (variable mix ratio). Video only play Movie picture : pure frame play Progressive : frame play Approx. 9.5× speed. Approx. 9.5× speed. Forward/reverse Forward/reverse 1/5× speed (corresponds to forward/reverse 1/10× speed) Forward/reverse Forward/reverse 2× speed Forward/reverse 1-9 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 6-5 Tape fast forward/rewind time Approx. 2 min. 20 sec. (using 60-minute tape) 6-6 Input signals 6-6-1 DV jack IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol SD format signal. 6-6-2 AV mini-jack a. Video signal NTSC standard color video signal Impedance 75 Ω Output signal level 1Vp-p (composite) b. Audio signal Signal type Stereo audio signal Impedance 47 KΩ or more Signal level −10dBv 6-6-3 S-video jack (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected) Signal configuration Y/C separate video signal Impedance 75 Ω Signal level 0.286Vp-p (composite) (color burst signal) 6-6-4 MIC jack (with docking unit DU-300 connected) φ 3.5mm mini stereo jack Impedance 5 KΩ or more Signal level −57dBv (using 600ohm microphone) 6-7 Output signals 6-7-1 DV jack 6-7-2 AV mini-jack a. Video signal Signal configuration Impedance Signal level b. Audio output signal Signal type IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol. φ 3.5mm, 4-pole mini-jack. NTSC standard color video signal 75 Ω 1Vp-p (composite) Stereo audio signal. AV mini-jack. 3 KΩ or less. −10dBv (47-KΩ load). 60Hz - 16KHz (1KHz standard: +/−3dB) Output impedance Output signal level Frequency response Audio signal S/N ratio Microphone input 48dB or more. External microphone input 48dB or more (using Docking Unit DU-300). 6-7-3 S-video jack (using Docking Unit DU-300). Signal configuration NTSC Y/C separate video signal. Video signal 1Vp-p (Brightness + sync signal) Color signal 0.286Vp-p (color burst signal) Brightness signal S/N ratio 45dB or more 6-7-4 Headphone jack (using Docking Unit DU-300). φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack. Output impedance 150 Ω Output signal level −25dBv (16 Ω load, maximum volume). 6-8 Memory card system (MC model only) 6-8-1 Memory card used Multi-media card, SD memory card. 6-8-2 Recordable images and image qualities Card record mode : Camera images can be recorded by operating the Photo button. The digital effects function and multi-screen function can also be used. VCR mode : Still images can be recorded by operating the Photo button (half-pressing freezes a frame and then full-pressing records) while playing a tape. Also, DV input images can also be recorded (no tape or tape stopped) by operating the Photo button (half-pressing freezes a frame and then full-pressing records). Image quality when recording from tape/DV input to a card. 1-10 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT Sorce Progressive animated image Photo recorded on tape with ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Record mode Images recorded to a card NTSC/PAL model Progressive frame image NTSC model PAL model NTSC model PAL model Normal animated image DV input Simple viewer frame Field image Simple viewer frame Field image 6-8-3 Recording system JPEG file conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) and DPOF (Digital Print Order Format). Card volume level CANON_DV DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxx CANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx : folder number yyyy: file number File numbers Files are controlled internally by folder number and file number. File numbers from 0001 to 9900 are allocated to recorded images. Up to 100 images can be saved in each folder. Numbers from 100 - 998 are allocated to the folders. Relationship between folder numbers and file numbers Folder No. File numbers 100 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100 101 0101 0102 0103 ････ 0199 0200 102 0201 0202 0203 ････ 0299 0300 198 9801 9802 9803 ････ 9899 9900 200 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100 9801 9802 9803 ････ 9899 9900 File contents Sample images provided at the factory ･･･ Image recording area ･･･ 998 Recorded images start from 101-0101. Basically, the numbers are allocated so that they are larger than the directory numbers and file numbers of the files stored in the multi-media card. 6-8-4 Recorded image size 6-8-5 Number of images recorded Fine mode Standard 6-8-6 Card format 6-9 Digital feature functions 6-9-1 Fader Fade time 6-9-2 Effects 640 (H) × 480 (V) SDC-8M Approx. 50 Approx. 80 The Format instruction on the menu of the body is used to format cards. Correct operation cannot be guaranteed when a personal computer is used for formatting because formatting may vary depending on the OS. Fader, effects, multi-screen modes are provided. Coupled to the / button. Can be executed once when Fade mode is displayed (mode display turns OFF when fader ends). Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned OFF. Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as indicated manually. Displays continue until turned OFF. Audio-synchronized fader. Auto fade (Japanese models : white fade; overseas models : black fade), wipe (left/right), scroll and mosaic fade. Approx. 4 sec. Art, monochrome, sepia, mosaic Operated by pressing the D. Effect button to toggle this function on and OFF. 6-9-3 Multi-screen Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4) Operation mode manual, fast (every 4 frames), normal (every 6 frames), slow (every 8 frames) 6-9-4 Card mix No 6-9-5 Relationship between digital features and operaion mode VCR/tape VCR/card (MC model only) ○ ○ ○ × × × × × Fader Effects Multi-screen Card mix function (MC mode only) 1-11 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 6-10 Other functions 6-10-1 Editing mechanism 6-10-2 6-10-3 6-10-4 6-10-5 Used for recording pauses and stops. Also possible when the power is turned off. This function is not effective, when the cassette is removed. Automatic stop mechanism Activates after approx. 5 min. of continuous forward still image playback or approx. 2 min. of continuous reverse still image playback, when the condensation warning appears. when the end or beginning of a tape is reached. Automatic power off mechanism Operates when recording pause continues for approx. 5 min., and when the battery voltage drops below the specified value. Time code Automatic writing during recording. 0:00:00:00 - 7:59:59:29 (hour:minute:second:frame). Photo search Used to search for photos recorded in the Photo mode. Forward/reverse photo search (operate the , keys after selecting Photo Search with the Search Select key of the remote control). Setting is possible for up to +/−10 numbers from the current position. 6-10-6 Date search This function is used to specify the parts of dates that differ when recordings were made on multiple dates. Forward/reverse date search (operate the , keys after selecting Date Search with the Search Select key of the remote control). Setting is possible for up to +/−10 numbers from the current position. 6-10-7 World clock display 6-10-8 Speaker 6-10-9 Battery charge function 7 Terminals 7-1 DV terminal 7-2 S-video terminal 7-3 Video/audio terminal 7-4 External microphone input terminal 7-5 Headphone terminal 7-6 Edit terminal 7-7 Multi-media card connection terminal 7-8 Battery terminal 8 Power supply 8-1 Input power supply 8-2 Power consumption Recording (Autofocus) 9 Size (W × H × D) 10 Mass (weight) 10-1 Weight of main unit 10-2 Total weight 12 Environmental conditions 12-1 Performance guarantee conditions 12-2 Operation guarantee conditions After the reference city (the city for which the clock time has been set) has been set, the date and time of the selected city will automatically be changed to the local date and time, and recorded on the photo when a photo is taken. Built-in. With volume adjustment. None. Special 4-pin connector (IEEE 1394 compatible), both input and output. 4-pin mini DIN, both input and output (using Docking Unit DU-300). φ 3.5mm, 4-pole pin jack (yellow), both input and output. φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack (using Docking Unit DU-300). φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack (using Docking Unit DU-300). φ 2.5mm mini-mini jack, LANC compatible (using Docking Unit DU-300). Special multi-pin jack (MC model only). Special 4-pin jack. 7.4VDC (battery pack), 7.2VDC (using the CA-410, CB-400). Approx. 4.4 W (CVF), approx. 5.4 W (LCD monitor)10 Size (width × height × depth) Approx. 48 × 106 × 86 mm (approx. 1-7/8 × 4-4/8 × 3-3/8 in.) (excluding small protuberrances) Approx. 13 3/4 oz (390 g) Approx. 1lb 5/8 oz (470 g) (Including BP-406, DVM-E30, lens cap, button type lithium battery, grip belt and SDC-8M (for MC model only)) 0°C ~ 40°C 85% (relative humidity) −5°C ~ 45°C 65% (relative humidity) 1-12 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 4. System Charts BP-900 Series Lithium-ion Battery Pack WL-D75/WL-D76 Wireless Controller MiniDV Video Cassette CH-910 Dual Battery Charger/Holder DC-400 DC Coupler ZR-1000 Zoom Remote Controller VL-10Li Battery Video Light CB-400 Car Battery Adapter DU-300 Docking Unit CA-400 Compact Power Adapter BP-406, BP-412 and BP-422 Battery Packs SA-1 Adapter Bracket DU-300 Docking Unit BP-900 Series Lithium-ion Battery Pack CA-910 Compact Power Adapter DU-300 Docking Unit Stereo Microphone (commercially available) TV S-150 S-video Cable STV-250N Stereo Video Cable CV-150F DV Cable SC-1000 Soft Carrying Case SC-A50 Soft Carrying Case SD Memory Card* or MultiMediaCard* * ELURA20 MC only Fig. 1-2 1-13 VCR Digital Device PC Card Adapter* Card Reader* FD Adapter* Personal Computer ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5. Viewfinder/ LCD Display Internal Display List 5-1 Camera Mode MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Camera mode OFF Zoom display (appears for approx. 4 sec. after zoom operation) Optical zoom W 40× digital zoom W T T Zoom stopped W T Zooming to Tele W T Zooming to Wide W T Hand jitter compensation display Hand jitter compensation ON Hand jitter compensation OFF No display Recording mode display SD mode SP recording LP recording SDL mode SP recording E LP recording E Operation mode display Recording Mirror mode (LCD) Recording pause Cassette ejected Stopped + Rec search − Rec search 1-14 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Program AE mode display Full auto mode Auto mode Sports mode Portrait mode Spotlight mode Surf & snow mode Low-light mode Program AE mode menu Tape counter display Time code (no frame display) When indeterminate M Zero set memory M M When indeterminate M EXP lock display Minimum exposure value Standard exposure value Maximum exposure value AE No display Timer display Remaining tape display Tape end When indeterminate Tape warning display (blink) Other No display 1-15 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Focus mode display AF off AF on No display Selftimer display Timer standby Timer operating Other No display Battery level Approx. 100% Approx. 75% Approx. 50% Approx. 25% Approx. 0% warning display (blink) With power supply adapter mounted No display Shutter speed display 1/60 sec. 1/100 sec. 1/250 sec. 1/500 sec. 1/1000 sec. 1/2000 sec. Auto No display Button type lithium battery low level warning display Remote control cord display When cord setting 1 is selected When cord setting 2 is selected Remote control receptor OFF White balance display When set Blinks in WB setting or NG. Lights up continuously after WB setting. Indoor preset Outdoor preset Auto No display Condensation warning display (blinks) Blinks in red. 1-16 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Headphone volume adjustment display Volume OFF OFF (MC model only) Card mix display Digital feature display When auto fade is selected When wipe is selected When scroll is selected When art is selected When black & white is selected When sepia is selected When mosaic is selected When multi-screen is selected When feature off is selected Window cut display Window cut ON Window cut OFF No display No display External microphone connected. OFF Date/time display When date and time are not set. Audio mode display When 16 bits is selected When 12 bits is selected 16:9 mode display When the 16:9 mode is selected Other No display Half-way press lock display AF/AE operation (blinks) AF/AE locked (light green) Focus mode display Nomal recording No display Frame movie selected Photo mode selected 1-17 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-2 VCR Mode MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS VCR Mode OFF Audio output display When 12-bit stereo 1 is selected When 12-bit stereo 2 is selected When 12-bit mix 1:1 is selected 12-bit mix variable is selected 16-bit No display Audio mix ratio display When ST-1:ST-2=1:0 When ST-1:ST-2=1:1 When ST-1:ST-2=0:1 Record mode display SP recording SD mode LP recording SDL mode SP recording E LP recording E Operation mode display Recording Pause When the cassette is ejected When stopped Play Fast forward Rewind No tape Fast forward play 2× speed play 1× speed play Forward slow play (Forward slow play) 1-18 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Forward frame play Forward still play Reverse still play Reverse frame play Reverse slow play (Reverse slow play) Reverse 1× speed play Reverse 2× speed play Rewind play Forward edit search Reverse edit search Forward date/photo search Reverse date/photo search FF return REW return AV insert pause AV insert record Audio dubbing pause Audio dubbing Tape counter Time code display When no setting Zero set memory Same as in Camera mode Remaining tape display Same as in Camera mode. Audio dubbing/insert or search display When AV insert is selected When dubbing is selected Date search Freeze frame photo search Other than search No display Battery level display Same as in camera mode. Remote control display Same as in camera mode. Battery warning display Same as in camera mode. Condensation warning display Same as in camera mode. 1-19 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Speaker volume adjustment display Volume OFF OFF Headphone volume adjustment display Same as in Camera mode. Data code display Date and time setting Date and time Data code setting Date and time & camera data Camera data Date setting Time setting Date & time setting Camera data Aperture value display The aperture value for this product is F1.6 and more. Aperture fully closed This product does not have a fully closed When no setting aperture function. Shutter speed display The shutter speeds for this product are 1/30 sec., 1/60-1/2,000 sec. When no setting Time display Time setting selected When no setting Time & time setting selected When no setting 1-20 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Day & time setting selected When no setting Wind cut display Same as in Camera mode. Audio data display When the audio dubbing/audio input terminal selected When the audio dubbing/microphone input terminal is selected Audio mode display Same as in Camera mode. 16:9 mode Same as in Camera mode. DV input DV input ＤＶ ＩＮ Other No display 1-21 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-3 Card Recording Mode (MC Model Only) MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Card recording mode 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617181920212223 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 M Zoom/exposure compensation display Same as in Camera mode. Hand jitter compensation display Same as in Camera mode. Card image quality display Program AE mode display Same as in Camera mode. Card access display Card remaining capacity display No card (blinks red) frames is 9999 or more (green) When the number of recordable frames is 99 (green) When the number of recordable frames is 5 (yellow) When the number of recordable frames is zero (0) (red) EXP lock display Same as in Camera mode. Focus mode display Same as in Camera mode. Selftimer display Same as in Camera mode. Battery level display Same as in Camera mode. 1-22 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Shutter speed display Auto mode selected Button type lithium battery low level Same as in Camera mode. warning display Remote control code display Same as in Camera mode. White balance display Same as in Camera mode. Battery low level warning display Same as in Camera mode. Condensation warning display Same as in Camera mode. Date display Same as in Camera mode. Photo button partially pressed Same as in Camera mode. (Date & time only) lock display 1-23 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Card review screen Card review mode display Card record image display Same as the card record image display in Card record mode. Card access display Writing to card Red display, sequential display. Reading from carad Green display, sequential display. Card remaining capacity display No card Checking card level No remaining capacity 99 frames remaining 1-24 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Image size display Image protect Image protect set/cancel Image delete mode Shift to image delete screen Return REMARKS Dot (horizontal) Exit card review mode Image protect set/cancel Image delete screen 1-25 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-4 Card Play Mode (MC Model only) MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Card Play Mode M Print mark display Protect display DCF file name display Directory number 100, file number 0001 Directory number 998, file number 9900 Card access display Writing to card Red display Sequential display Reading from card Green display Sequential display 1-26 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS Image number display No card Checking number of cards recorded Zero (0) card recorded 9th of 99 cards recorded 99th of 99 cards recorded 9900th of 9900 cards recorded Dot (Horizontal) × (Vertical) Image size Data display Same as in VCR mode (Date & time only) Slide show M Slide show operation guide display slide show in progress 1-27 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-5 Menu Displays Menu displays include Camera mode, VCR mode, Card recording mode and Card play mode. Camera Mode MAIN MENU ITEM D. EFFECT SUB–MENU ITEM D. EFFECT FADER EFFECT M. S. SPEED M. S. SPLIT CARD MIX CAMERA SET UP VCR SET UP SETTING ITEM OFF FADER EFFECT MULTI-S FADE-T WIPE SCROLL ART BLK & WHT SEPIA MOSAIC MANUAL FAST MODERATE SLOW 4 9 16 RETURN Shift the Card Mix Screen Displays SHUTTER AUTO 1/60 1/100 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 DIGITAL ZOOM ON OFF IMAGE S. ON OFF 16:9 ON OFF WHIT BAL AUTO SET INDOOR OUTDOOR RETURN REC MODE SP LP E SP E LP WIND SCREEN ON OFF AUDIO MODE *2 16 bit 12 bit RETURN 1-28 DEFAULT BACKUP OFF Lithium battery FADE-T Lithium battery ART Lithium battery MODERATE Lithium battery 4 Lithium battery AUTO Lithium battery ON Lithium battery ON Lithium battery OFF Lithium battery AUTO Lithium battery SP Lithium battery ON Lithium battery 12 bit Lithium battery ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MAIN MENU ITEM DISP. SET TP SUB–MENU ITEM DEFAULT BRIGHTNESS *1 MIRROR *1 TV SCREEN D/T DISPLAY *1 SYSTEM SETTING ITEM Lithium battery ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Lithium battery ON Lithium battery OFF Lithium battery RETURN WL REMOTE *2 TALLY LAMP *1 BEEP *1 T. ZONE/DST *2 D/TIME SEL *2 BACKUP Lithium battery OFF ON OFF ON OFF LONDON LONDON PARIS PARIS ······ CAIRO MOSCOW DUBAI KARACHI DACCA BANGKOK H. KONG TOKYO SYDNEY SOLOMON WELLGTN SAMOA HONOLU. ANCHOR L.A. DENVER CHICAGO N.Y. CARACAS RIO FERNEN. ······ AZORES AZORES JAN. 1,2001 12:00 AM ON Lithium battery ON Lithium battery N.Y. Lithium battery JAN. 1,2001 12:00 AM Lithium battery DEC.31,2001 11:59 PM RETURN RETURN *1 : *2 : TALLY LAMP, BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR and D/T DISPLAY data are displayed on the Menu screen only. On other screens, they are displayed for 4 seconds after Power ON and Menu Exit. D/TIME SEL is displayed only when D/T DISPLAY is OFF. WL REMOTE “OFF ( 1-29 )” is always displayed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT VCR Mode MAIN MENU ITEM D. EFFECT SUB–MENU ITEM OFF D. EFFECT EFFECT M. S. SPEED M. S. SPLIT RETURN REC MODE OUTPUT CH*1 AUDIO DUB WIND SCREEN AUDIO MODE CARD SET UP RETURN QUALITY IMAGE NOS. *1 SHTR SOUND CARD OPER. RETURN COPY [ ] DISP. SET UP RETURN BRIGHTNESS *1 DISPLAY 6 SEC. DATE *1 DATA CODE *2 ] DEFAULT BACKUP OFF Lithium battery FADE-T Lithium battery ART Lithium battery MODERATE Lithium battery 4 Lithium battery SP LP E SP E LP L/R L/L R/R AUDIO IN MIC. IN ON OFF 16 bit 12 bit SP Lithium battery L/R Lithium battery AUDIO IN Lithium battery ON Lithium battery 12 bit Lithium battery FINE STANDARD RESET CONTINUOUS ON OFF FINE Lithium battery CONTINUOUS Lithium battery ON Lithium battery CANCEL ----- EFFECT MULTI-S FADE-T WIPE SCROLL MOSAIC ART BLK & WHT SEPIA MOSAIC MANUAL FAST MODERATE SLOW 4 9 16 FADER VCR SET UP SETTING ITEM CANCEL EXECUTE Lithium battery ON OFF ON OFF DATE/TIME CAMERA DATA CAM & D/T 1-30 ON Lithium battery OFF Lithium battery DATE/TIME Lithium battery ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM DISP. SET UP D/TIME SEL *2 SYSTEM RETURN WL. REMOTE TALLY LAMP BEEP *1 SETTING ITEM DATE TIME DATE & TIME DEFAULT DATE & TIME BACKUP Lithium battery Lithium battery OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Lithium battery ON Lithium battery REUTRN RETURN *1 : BRIGHTNESS, 6 SEC. DATE, OUTPUT CH and BEEP data are displayed on the Menu screen only. *2 : On other screens, DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on. 1-31 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT Camera Recording Mode (Card/Camera Mode) (MC model only) MAIN MENU ITEM D. EFFECTS SUB–MENU ITEM D. EFFECT EFFECT M. S. SPEED M. S. SPLIT CAM. SET UP RETURN SHUTTER D. ZOOM IMAGE S. WHIT BAL CARD SET UP RETURN QUALITY FILE NOS. *1 SHTR SOUND *1 DISP. SET UP OFF DEFAULT TV SCREEN D/T DISPLAY *1 Lithium battery ART Lithium battery MODERATE Lithium battery 4 Lithium battery AUTO Lithium battery OFF Lithium battery ON OFF AUTO SET INDOOR OUTDOOR ON Lithium battery AUTO Lithium battery FINE STANDARD RESET CONTINUOUS ON OFF FINE Lithium battery CONTINUOUS Lithium battery ON Lithium battery AUTO 1/60 1/100 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 ON OFF Lithium battery ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Lithium battery ON Lithium battery OFF Lithium battery RETURN WL REMOTE *2 BEEP *1 BACKUP OFF EFFECT MULTI-S ART BLK & WHT SEPIA MOSAIC MANUAL FAST MODERATE SLOW 4 9 16 RETURN BRIGHTNESS *1 MIRROR *1 SYSTEM SETTING ITEM Lithium battery OFF ON OFF ON 1-32 Lithium battery ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MAIN MENU ITEM SYSTEM SUB–MENU ITEM T. ZONE/DST *2 D/TIME SEL *2 SETTING ITEM LONDON LONDON PARIS PARIS ······ CAIRO MOSCOW DUBAI KARACHI DACCA BANGKOK H.KONG TOKYO SYDNEY SOLOMON WELLGTN SAMOA HONOLU. ANCHOR L.A. DENVER CHICAGO N.Y. CARACAS RIO FERNEN. ······ AZORES AZORES JAN. 1, 2001 12:00 AM DEFAULT BACKUP N.Y. Lithium battery JAN. 1, 2001 12:00 AM Lithium battery DEC.31,2001 11:59 PM RETURN RETURN *1 : *2 : BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR, D/T DISPLAY, FILE NOS., and SHTR SOUND data are displayed on the Menu screen only. On other screens, they are displayed for 4 seconds after Power ON and Menu Exit. D/TIME SEL is displayed only when D/T DISPLAY is OFF. WL REMOTE “OFF( 1-33 )” is always displayed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT Card Play Mode (Card/VCR Modes) (MC Model Only) MAIN MENU ITEM CARD SET UP (SINGLE DISPLAY) SUB–MENU ITEM COPY [ ] PRINT MARK IMAGE ERASE FORMAT VCR SET UP RETURN PROTECT PRINT MARK RETURN REC MODE DISP. SET UP RETURN BRIGHTNESS *1 CARD SET UP (INDEX DISPLAY) DISPLAY D/TIME SEL *2 SYSTEM SETTING ITEM CANCEL EXECUTE CANCEL SINGLE ALL CANCEL EXECUTE DEFAULT CANCEL Shift to Delete All Print Marks CANCEL CANCEL BEEP *1 SP LP SP ----- ----- Lithium battery Lithium battery ON OFF DATE TIME DATE & TIME ON Lithium battery DATE & TIME Lithium battery Lithium battery OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Lithium battery ON Lithium battery RETURN RETURN *1 : *2 : ----- Shift to Image Protect Mode. Shift to Print Mark Mode. RETURN WL REMOTE TALLY LAMP BACKUP BRIGHTNESS, OUTPUT CH and BEEP data are displayed on the menu screen only. On other screens, DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on. 1-34 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-6 Card Mix Screen Displays MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Card mix selection screen Mix key setting screen Mix level setting screen Slide show screen 1-35 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Index screen Image protect screen Print mark screen 1-36 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Copy screen Copy ( NORTH AMERICA MODEL ) selection screen Copy ( ) execute screen Copy ( ) selection screen Copy ( ) execute screen 1-37 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Image delete screen Image delete selection screen One image deletion Deletion in progress warning All images deletion 1-38 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL Format screen Format confirmation screen Format execution screen 1-39 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 5-7 Warning Display COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED · Displayed when a copyright protected tape is played back. COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED · Displayed when copyright data is detected during DV input. Also displayed when signals output from a TV set or vide are disrupted ruing analog line input. SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME · Displayed when the power is turned on when the time zone, date and time have not been set. REMOVE THE CASSETTE · Displayed if a cassette is loaded when a mechanical error or condensation is detected. CHECK THE DV INPUT · Displayed when REC is pressed in a mode in which recording is possible but either DV input is not connected or, if connected is not recognized for some reason. CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK · Displayed when the battery is exhausted. CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED · Displayed when condensation is detected (if cassette is loaded, this message will be followed by “REMOVE THE CASSETTE”). THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION · Displayed in the VCR mode when REC is pressed in a mode in which recording is possible but the cassette is set for erase protection. In the Camera mode, this message is displayed when the power is turned on, when the START/STOP button is pressed and when a cassette is loaded. TAPE END · Displayed when a key [FF, PLAY, etc.] that forwards the tape is pressed at the tape end or in a mode that can forward the tape during detection. CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE] · Displayed when the Audio Dubbing or the AV insert button is pressed in a section recorded in LP/ESP/ELP, or when the LP/ ESP/ELP modes are detected during audio dubbing or AV insert. CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE] · Displayed when the Audio Dubbing button is pressed in a section with 16-bit or 4-ch simultaneous recording. Also displayed when the 16-bit/4-ch simultaneous recording mode is detected during audio dubbing. CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK] · Displayed when an unrecorded section is detected during audio dubbing or AV insert. 1-40 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE · Displayed when the head is clogged. CARD ERROR · Displayed when recording is not possible because of a card error. (MC model only). CARD FULL · Displayed when there is no available space on a card. (MC model only). NAMING ERROR · Displayed when the file numbers or directory numbers have reached he maximum. (MC model only). UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE · Displayed when an attempt is made to playback an image in a format that cannot be played back, a noncompatible JPEG image or an image with damaged data. (MC model only). PRINT MARK ERROR · Displayed when there are too many (51 or more) print marks or the mark file cannot be edited. (MC model only). NO CARD · Displayed when there is no card in the body socket. (MC model only). NO IMAGES · Displayed when there are no images on a card to play back. (MC model only). THE CARAD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION · Displayed when an attempt is made to write to a SD card (VCR mode, card record mode) that is erase protected. (MC model only). ** When a problem occurs, these warnings are displayed for approx. 4 sec. In the center of the screen. ** The only operation possible while a warning is being displayed is to change the mode, which causes the warning to disappear. 1-41 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 6. Data Backup 6-1 Main Power Supply Backup The condensation timer is backed up only by the main power supply. 6-2 Backup by the Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Button Type Lithium Primary Battery) Items other than the menu items backed up by the main power supply or backup power supply(button type lithium primary battery). Item Default Digital zoom position Optical Tele WB date(SET) ----- Date/time setting(auto date) 2001.1.1 12:00AM Menu cursor position Uppermost position Time code ----- Mix balance Center Headphone volume Center Speaker volume Center Mechanical error ----- 1-42 Remarks Reset by removing the main power supply ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 6-3 Backup Conditions Using Switch Operation 6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power Supply When the camera mode is “Program AE”. , turn on the camera power and then follow the procedure in 6-3-3 Setting the Full Auto mode. In the Full Auto mode Item Power switch OFF/VCR ● Camera mode, Card record mode Program AE modes Backup Manual focus ON/OFF Backup EXP lock ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Headphone volume *CAM Selftimer ON/OFF Backup Reset (to OFF) On-screen ON/OFF Backup Zero set memory counter value *CAM Backup ● Camera, Card recording menu item setting Digital effect selection Backup *Independent Fader *CAM Backup *Independent Effect Backup *independent Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent Multi-screen number Backup *Independent Card mix key selection *CAM (MC model only) Backup Card mix level *CAM (MC model only) Backup Shutter speed setting Backup Digital zoom setting Backup Hand jitter compensation ON/OFF Backup 16:9 ON/OFF *CAM Backup White balance setting Backup Remote control code setting Backup TALLY lamp *CAM Backup Record mode setting *CAM Backup Warning buzzer ON/OFF Backup Wind cut ON/OFF Backup Audio mode setting *CAM *SD Backup LCD Brightness adjustment Backup Mirror photo setting Backup On-screen ON/OFF Backup Day/time display Backup Time zone/daylight saving time setting Backup Date/time setting Backup Image quality *CD Backup Number reset *CD Backup Shutter sound *CD Backup * CAM* Camera mode only *CD : Card Record mode only (MC model only) * Independent : The Card/camera mode, Camera mode and VCR mode are backed up independently. * SD : SP/LO mode only. Still image selection for card mix recording (card mix standby) is not backed up when the power is turned OFF. 1-43 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 6-3-2 Other Power Switch Positions Item Power switch OFF ● VCR mode Headphone volume Backup Speaker volume On-screen ON/OFF Backup Reset (to OFF) Zero set memory counter value Data code display ON/OFF Audio 12-bit output selection Backup Reset (to OFF) Reset (to stereo 1) Mix balance setting Search selection photo search/date search Backup Reset (to photo search) ● VCR menu item setting Digital effect selection Backup *Independent Fader *CAM Backup Independent Effect Backup *Independent Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent Multi-screen number Backup *Independent Remote control code setting Backup Record mode setting Backup Data code setting Backup Date/time select setting Backup LCD Brightness adjustment Backup Text display during playback ON/OFF Backup Auto date/time display ON/OFF Backup Bilingual setting Reset (to main + sub) Audio dubbing input setting Backup Wind cut ON/OFF Backup Line in audio mode setting Backup Warning buzzer ON/OFF Backup Image quality (MC model only) Backup Number reset (MC model only) Backup ● Card play mode (MC model only) On-screen ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Data code display ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) ● Card play mode menu item setting (MC model only) Remote control code setting Backup Record mode setting Backup Data code setting Backup Date/time selection Backup LCD Brightness adjustment Backup Text display during playback Backup Date auto display Backup Warning buzzer Backup 1-44 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 6-3-3 Switching the Camera Mode/Switching the Program AE Mode When the / switch is switched from (Program AE) to (Full Auto), and when the / switch is at , the various items are backed up if switched to other program AE mode. Item Full Auto Switch the Program AE mode ● Camera mode, Card recording mode (MC model only) Program AE mode type Reset (to Auto) ––––– Autofocus ON/OFF Reset (to ON) Backup EXP lock ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Reset (to OFF) DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Backup Headphone volume Backup Backup Selftimer ON/OFF Backup Backup On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup Zero set memory counter value *CAM Backup Backup ● Camera mode, Card recording mode (MC model only) menu item setting Digital effect selection Backup *Independent Backup *Independent Fader *CAM Backup *Independent Backup *Independent Effect Backup *Independent Backup *Independent Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent Backup *Independent Multi-screen number Backup 'Independent Backup *Independent Card mix selection *CAM (MC model only) Backup Backup Card mix level *CAM (MC model only) Backup Backup Card mix record image selection *CAM Reset Backup Reset (to Auto) Reset (to Auto) Backup Backup (MC model only) (card mix standby) Shutter speed Digital zoom ON/OFF Hand jitter compensation Reset (to ON) Backup 16:9 *CAM Reset (to OFF) Backup White balance Reset (to Auto) Backup Remote control code Backup Backup Tally lamp ON/OFF *CAM Backup Backup Record mode *CAM Backup Backup Warning buzzer Backup Backup Wind cut Backup Backup Audio mode *CAM Backup Backup LCD Brightness adjustment Backup Backup Mirror photo setting Backup Backup On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup Day/time display Backup Backup Time zone/daylight saving time Backup Backup Date/time setting Backup Backup Image quality *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup Image size *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup Number reset *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup Shutter sound *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup * CAM * Camera mode only *CD : Card Record mode only (MC model only) * Independent:The Card/camera mode, Camera mode and VCR mode are backed up independently. • Card mix recording of still image selection(card mix standby)is not backed up in either normal or progressive. • Backup for timer power OFF for a 5-minute record pause and for LANC power OFF is the same as for when the power switch is turned OFF. 1-45 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7. Others 7-1 Green Mode Green Mode Default Status • Focus --------------------------------------- Auto • Exposure ---------------------------------- Auto • White balance ---------------------------- Auto • DE, DF ------------------------------------ OFF • Hand jitter compensation --------------- ON • Shutter ------------------------------------- Auto • 16:9 ---------------------------------------- OFF Other than the above, all statuses will remain the same even at the Green mode position. Keys that are Ineffective in the Green Mode. • Focus (Auto/Manual) button (compulsory Auto) • Exposure (Auto/Lock) button (compulsory Auto) • Multi-dial • Digital effect (ON/OFF) button (compulsory OFF) Relationship between the Program AE Mode and the Various Photo Functions Item Autofocus ON/OFF Shutter speed setting Compulsory ON ● ● ● ● ● ● × ● × × × × × × ● ● ● × × ● Hand jitter compensation ON/OFF Compulsory ON ● ● ● ● ● ● White balance setting Compulsory Auto ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● AE lock Wind cut ON/OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Compulsory OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● Digital fader ON/OFF × ● ● ● ● ● ● Digital effect ON/OFF × ● ● ● ● ● ● Multi-screen × ● ● ● ● ● ● Photo recording (tape recording) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Progressive photo recording ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Card mix (MC model only) × ● ● ● ● ● ● Digital zoom ON/OFF 16:9 ON/OFF 7-2 On-Screen • On-screen can be turned on and OFF using LANC, infrared remote control or the menu. • Text on line out will be white during on-screen (LCD panel and CVF text will be in color). • The display defaults are ON in the Camera mode and OFF in the VCR mode. 7-3 Headphone (with Docking Unit DU-300 Connected), Speaker • The speaker is OFF in the Camera mode. • The speaker is ON during normal VCR mode playback and the volume can be adjusted with the Multi-dial. • Headphone volume can be adjusted with the Multi-dial only when Headphone has been mounted. • The speaker is turned OFF when Headphone is selected from the menu. 1-46 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-4 Battery Level display, Warning Displays and (Low-Power) Power Shutoff Battery Level Display • When a battery is used, the 5-step battery level display before the low power warning is displayed (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 0% (approx.)) will be reset when the power is turned OFF. In other words, if the voltage is restored while the power is OFF, the battery level display will show an increase when the power is again turned ON. Once the low-power display has appeared, however, the low-power warning will not be reset, even if the voltage is restored. • When the AC adapter is used, there is no battery level display. If the voltage should drop drastically below the warning level warning, however, the battery level warning will appear. Also, the battery level warning will turn OFF when the battery voltage rises above the power-OFF warning level. 7-5 System Data Display Camera mode VCR mode Camera screen Rec search DIF input Blue background PB (special playback) Data code (date/time) × LANC appears × LANC appears × --- ~ --- ● Data code (camera data) × × × F - - -, etc. × F - - -, etc. ● Time code ● ● ● Body ● ● Audio mode (12/16 bit) ● 4-sec. display × ● DIF × ● Wide/normal ● Setting display × ● DIF × ● CGMS (warning) ~ ● ● DIF × ● SP/LP ● Setting display ● ● Setting display ● Setting display ● * The time code display is “-: -: -: -:” for unrecorded sections and when there is no tape. * CGMS: not output to LINE OUT and CVF (panel) when copying is prohibited. 7-6 Data Code display Data code can be used to turn displays ON and OFF independently (without regard to other on-screen text displays.) 7-7 MP Tape Capability LP as well as ESP and ELP recording is not possible with MP tape. Even if LP, ESP or ELP is selected from menu, the SP mode will always be set when a tape is loaded. LP playback is possible with tapes recorded in the LP mode. 7-8 Warning Buzzer The warning buzzer will sound melodically in the following cases. Mode Tone color Power on Peep When a cassette tape whose erase protection knob is set to Save is loaded (Camera mode) Peep, peep, peep When the EJECT cover is left open (including power off) Peep, peep When recording starts (Camera mode) Peep During REC PAUSE (Camera mode) Peep, peep Photo button partially pressed OK Peep, peep Photo REC start Peep When condensation is detected, when a camera error occurs, and 5 sec. Beep × 5 before the REC PAUSE (*) 5-min. timer ends When the Setting button is operated while menu selection is not possible Boop 20 sec., 15 sec., and 10 sec. before the REC PAUSE (*) 5-min. timer ends Beep, beep, beep Seiftimer (syncs with tally blinking) Peep, peep, 1-sec. interval × 8 Peep, 0.25-sec. interval × 8 REC PAUSE (*) includes audio dubbing and AV insert REC PAUSE. * Peep = 4KHz; beep = 2KHz; boop 1KHz 1-47 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-9 Using Analog Line, DV Recording (1) Set the power switch to [VCR]. The Power LED (green) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, standby status will be activated. The jack (DVAS-video, AV mini) status will be output, and headphone jack (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected) and speaker will be output (higher priority in headphone). (2) Connect a cable from a recording source to the S-video jack* (video signal) and AV mini jack (audio signal), or to the AV mini jack (video and audio signals), or to the DV jack; then turn on the recording source power supply. If the recording source is connected to multiple jacks at the same time, the recording source is automatically selected in following jack priority. DV Jack> S-video Jack * > AV Jack * : (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected) During playback (including special play), the playback image will have a higher priority. (3) On the remote control, press [REC STANDBY]. Recording pause status will be activated. In the case of analog line input, the S-video jack and AV mini jack will switch to input. (4) To start recording, press [ / ] of the remote controller. Recording of the video and audio from the jack selected in item (2) will start. ([ / ] toggles the record and record pause operations.) (5) Press [■] to stop recording. Recording will stop. The Table below Shows the Input and Output Status for Each Mode. DV input signal present Playback (including special playback) No DV input signal present LCD/CVF DV jack S/AV jack LCD/CVF DV jack S/AV jack Playback screen OUT OUT Playback screen OUT OUT No tape, STOP, FF, REW DV input screen IN OUT Blue background OUT OUT REC PAUSE/PEG DV input screen IN OUT Line input screen * IN IN * There is no signal when there is no line input. 7-10 VIdeo ID1 Detection/Output Capability (1) S1 signal output When 16:9 images are output from the S-video jack in the Full (Squeeze) mode compressed to 4:3, an identification signal is output to automatically return them to 16:9 images for wide monitors with S1 capability (when tape on which is recorded system data related to the camera 16:9 mode or aspect ratio is played back.) • NTSC → 16:9 full mode + 4:3 letterbox mode identification signal output (2) Video ID1 output When 16:9 images are output from the composite video jack in the Full (Squeeze) mode compressed to 4:3, an identification signal is output to automatically return them to 16:9 images for wide monitors with Video ID1 capability (when tape on which is recorded system data related to the camera 16:9 mode or aspect ratio is played back.) (3) S1 signal and video ID1 detection with line input When video ID1 and S1 signals superimposed over video signals from the composite video jack or S-video jack are detected, the system data related to aspect ratio is recorded. 1-48 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-11 Closed Caption Detection/Output (1) Closed caption signal output • When tape on which closed caption data are recorded is played back, the closed caption data is output superimposed over the video signal. • The caption data can be displayed on the screen if the monitor has a built-in closed caption decoder. (2) Closed caption signal detection • During analog or digital line input recording, the closed caption data in the input signal is detected and the closed caption data is then recorded. 7-12 Audio Dubbing 7-12-1 Tape Usable for Audio Dubbing Only tapes with 12-bit SP recording other than for dubbing 4-channel simultaneous recordings can be used. If an attempt is made to use any other tape, the Stop mode will be activated. If the LP mode, 16-bit mode, 4-ch simultaneous recordings, unrecorded or SDL ( E SP / E LP mode) recordings are detected → Stop (warning display). 7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source The audio dubbing input source is selected from the VCR menu. Either of two items can be selected: Line (AV mini jack) or Mic. When Mic is selected, input will be from the external microphone if one is connected; otherwise, input will be from the built-in microhone. 7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Operation (1) In the VCR mode, position and pause the tape to be dubbed, then press the dubbing key of the remote control. The dubbing mode will be activated (dubbing pause) and (dubbing pause) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF). (2) Press the Pause key and input sound into the microphone. Dubbing will start. (3) Press the stop ■ key to stop. The dubbing mode will be canceled, the dubbing display will disappear and operation will stop. • If the pause ■ key is pressed instead of the stop key, the dubbing mode will not be canceled and status (1) (dubbing pause) will return. • Dubbing can also be canceled by pressing the dubbing key during dubbing pause. • Also, if the Zero Set Memory key of the remote control is pressed at the tape position where dubbing is to be ended, operation will automatically stop and dubbing will be canceled when that position is reached after operation (2). 1-49 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-13 AV Insert In the AV insert mode, the audio, video and sub-code areas are overwritten, but not the ITI (Insert and Track Information) area. 7-13-1 Tape Usable for AV Insert Only tape recorded in the SP mode can be used for AV insert. If an attempt is made to use any other tape, the Stop mode will be activated. If the LP mode, an unrecorded section or SDL mode is detected, operation will also stop (warning display). 7-13-2 AV Insert Operation (1) In the VCR mode, position and pause the tape to be used for AV insert, then press the AV Insert key of the remote control. The AV Insert mode will be activated (AV Insert Pause) and ● (AV Insert Pause) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF). (2) Press the Pause key and input the video and audio. AV insert will start. ● (AV Insert) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF). (3) Press the Stop [■] key to stop. The AV Insert mode will be canceled, the AV Insert display will disappear and operation will stop. • If the Pause [■] key is pressed instead of the Stop key, the AV Insert mode will not be canceled and status (1) (AV Insert pause) will return. * AV Insert can also be canceled by pressing the AV Insert key of the remote control during AV Insert Pause. * Also, if the Zero Set Memory key of the remote control is pressed at the tape position where AV insert is to be ended, operation will automatically stop and AV insert will be canceled when that position is reached after operation (2). 7-14 Multi-Dial VCR operation and various settings are performed in accordance with the body mode. Dial Rotation Body mode Using the menu Menu Operational function Rotating the dial upward Item selection The cursor moves upward LCD Brightness adjustment Brightness adjustment The LCD screen becomes brighter Card mix level adjustment Mix level adjustment The mix level range narrows EXP lock EXP compensation The aperture opens Manual focus Focus adjustment Focus shifts to close-up VCR mode : Speaker volume adjustment The volume increases Pushing the Dial Body mode Photo pause Operational function Program AE,AE menu open/close Dial push Program AE mode selection (selection confirmation) Digital effect Digital effect mode selection switch Digital effect mode is selected. Menu Menu setting item switch An item is selected. 1-50 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-15 LCD Panel/CVF (Color ViewFinder) LCD panel and CVF power supply status 7-15-1 Camera Mode/Camera Recording Mode LCD panel layout LCD panel power supply CVF power supply OFF ON ON OFF Stored (panel surface side of body) Stored (outside panel surface) Mirror mode aborted Open ON OFF Mirror photo status ON ON * : Panel display is restricted (but CVF and on-screen displays are normal) in the Mirror mode. Only the following codes are displayed in the upper left corner. • Camera mode: only Recording ●. Recording pause , Inject display • Card recording mode: No card , Card & access indicator <<<< (The Mirror mode is temporarily canceled during record search and various menu settings.) 7-15-2 VCR Mode/Card Play Mode LCD panel layout LCD panel power supply CVF power supply Stored (panel surface side of body) OFF ON Stored (outside panel surface) ON OFF Open ON OFF Mirror photo status ON OFF 7-16 Memory Card System 7-16-1 Card Recording (Card Recording of Still Images) a. Still Recording of Camera Images (1) Set the Power switch to Cameran, and set the Photo mode switch to or . The Power lamp will light (red) and recording status will be activated if a card has been loaded. (2) Frame the subject in the center of the screen from the desired angle, then partially press the [Photo] key. “ ” will blink white, focus and AE will be locked and, when the operation of the hand jitter compensation function has been restricted, “ ” will light green. (3) Frame the subject and fully press the [Photo] key. “ ” will go out and the image will be recorded on the card at the instant the key is fully pressed. During the card recording, the red access display (“>>>>”) will blink ( > → >> → >>> → >>>> → > • • •) toward the “Card mark ”. During this time, the image being recorded will stop (freeze) on the LCP panel (or CVF) so the result can be checked. (In the mirror photo mode, “>>>>”will blink white toward the Card mark.) b. Card Recording of VCR Images During Playback (1) Tape is played back using normal playback. If the [Photo] button is partially pressed during tape playback, the card data will appear on the screen and, at the same time, Play Pause will be activated. lf the [Photo] button is now fully pressed, the still image will be recorded on the card. The above operation can also be performed during Play Pause. 1-51 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT c. Card Recording of DV Input Images (1) Set the Power switch to [VCR]. The Power lamp (green) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, standby status will be activated. (2) Connect a cable from the recording source to the DV jack and turn on the source power supply. (3) If the [Photo] button is pressed when there is no tape or the tape is in stop status, the card data will appear on the screen and, at the same time, DV input will stop. If the [Photo] button is now fully pressed, the still image will be recorded on the card. * When an image recorded in the 16:9 mode is recorded on a card, it will be recorded on the card in vertical format. * Card recording of still image is not possible during analog line input (S-video jack, AV jack) 7-16-2 Copying [ ]/[ ] Still image (Photo record) scenes recorded on tape are automatically searched and recorded sequentially on a card (VCR mode copy [ ]). Still images recorded on a card can also be photo recorded sequentially as still images on tape (card play mode copy [ ]). a. Copy( ) Still image (Photo record) scenes recorded on tape are automatically searched and recorded sequentially on a card. (1) Set the Power switch to [VCR]. (2) Use [FF] and [REW] keys to locate the desired start position on the tape. Move the current tape position forward of the still image (Photo record) to be copied. (3) Use the [Menun key to open the menu, select the “Card Execute” and “Card Execute” sub menu “Copy [ ]” and then press the [Settings] key. Cancel/Execute will appear. To abort copying, select Cancel and press the [Settings] key. To execute the copy, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key. (4) When Execute has been selected and set, the Copy Execute screen (tape data is displayed in the upper left corner and card data is displayed in the lower right corner) will open and the copy operation will start. During the copy operation, a still image search of the tape will be performed starting from the current tape position. The still images discovered during the search are recorded as still images on the card. This operation will repeat until the end of the tape is reached or the card becomes full. The copy operation can be halted at any time by pressing the Stop key [■]. b. Copy ( ) Still image scenes recorded on card are automatically recorded in sequence as still images on tape. (1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode. (2) Use the [+] and [-] keys to display the desired image (the image where copying is to start). When copying from a card to tape, copying will proceed sequentially from the currently displayed image to the last image. (3) Use the [Menu] key to open the menu, select the “Card Execute menu” and press the [Settings] key. From the “Card Execute” menu, select “Copy [ ]” and then press the [Settings] key to open the Copy Execute screen, where “Cancel/Execute” will appear. To abort copying, select “Cancel” and press the [Settings] key. To execute the copy, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key. (4) When Execute has been selected and set, the Copy Execute screen (card data is displayed in the upper left corner and tape data is displayed in the lower right corner) will open and the copy operation will start. During the copy operation, the currently displayed still image search will be photo copied to the tape and then the next image will be displayed. This operation will repeat sequentially until the last image has been copied or the end of the tape has been reached. The copy operation can be halted at any time by pressing the Stop key[■]. 1-52 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-16-3 Card Mix (1) Set the Power switch to “Movie” and set the Photo mode switch to . The Power lamp (red) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, recording pause status will be activated. (2) Press the [Menu] key and select “ Card Mix” from the main menu. (3) The Card Mix sub-menu will open and the still image to be recorded on the card will appear instantaneously. Next, the card image and camera image will be mixed. The mix type, mix level and mix images can now be checked. lf the [Menu] key is not pressed at this time to close the menu, it will not be possible to enter card mix standby status (standby status cannot be entered unless an image has been recorded and can be played back). When the Card [+] and [-] keys are pressed, the card still images will appear. When Mix Type is selected and the [Settings] key is pressed, three setting items will appear: “Card chroma key”, “Card luminance key” and “Camera chroma key”. Select the desired mix method from among these three. Also, when “Mix Level” is selected and the [Settings] key is pressed, the slide bar [ ] will appear for setting the mix level. When the desired mix level has been set, press the [Settings] key to establish the setting. (4) When the [Menu] key is pressed to close the menu, the Card Mix Standby status will be activated. (5) When the [Start/Stop] button is pressed, card mix moving images will be recorded to the cassette tape. When the [Photo] button is pressed, card mix still images will be recorded on the cassette tape. * Even if the above card mix settings have been made, the image selection settings and standby status will be canceled by the following operations; therefore, it will be necessary to make the Image settings again. • When the Power switch has been set to another mode. • When the Photo Mode switch has been set to Green mode. 7-16-4 Card Playback a. Normal Playback/Slide Show (1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode. The Power lamp will light (green) and, if a card has been loaded and if there are images, the last image will be displayed. If no images have been recorded, a blue background will be displayed and the warning “No images” will be displayed for about 4 sec. The Card [+] and [-] keys can be used to display the previous and next images. When the [+] key is pressed at the last image, the first image will be displayed. When the [-] key is pressed at the first image, the last image will be displayed. (2) When the [Slide Show] button is pressed a slide show will start from the currently displayed image. Each of the image will be displayed for approx. 5 sec. and then the next image will appear. The slide show can be canceled by again pressing the [Slide Show] button. The [Slide Show] key is toggled on starting and ending the slide show operation. * The last image is the image with the largest directory number and the highest image number. The first image is the image with the smallest directory number and the smallest image number. b. Index Screen Six images can be displayed on one screen, making it easy to search images. (1) Press the [Index] key to change to the Index screen. Press again to return to the previous playback mode. From the Index screen, the Multi-dial is used to select images (the mark will appear on the left side of the image). (2) A The images on the screen can be selected sequentially by operating the Multidial. If the Multi-dial is again operated after the last (or first) image on the screen has been selected, the top (or. the last) screen will be displayed automatically. Screens showing 6 images each can be selected by operating the Card [+] and [-] keys. Only one selected image can be displayed normally by pressing the [Index] key. 1-53 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-16-5 Image Protecting Setting It is possible to protect (erase protection) important images so they cannot be erased even if an attempt is made by mistake. (1) Press the [Index] key to open the Index screen, and press the [Menu] key to open the Menu screen. (2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select the “ Image Protect ” and press the [Settings] key to display the “Image Protect” screen (one screen displays 6 images). The Multi-dial can be used to select images from the “Image Protect” screen in the same way as for the Index screen described above. After the images have been selected, protection for the selected images can be toggled “ON/ OFF” by pressing the [Settings] key. The protect mark ( ) will be appended to identify the protected images. 7-16-6 Print Mark Setting The print mark (DPOF mark) is a function that can be used to automatically select images for printing with a printer or by a lab. (1) Select the “Card Execute” menu in the same way as in item (1) in image protection setting described above. (2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select the “ Print Mark ” and press the [Settings] key to display the “Print Mark” screen (one screen displays 6 images). The Multi-dial can be used to select images from the “Print Mark” screen in the same way as for the Index screen described above After the images have been selected, the print mark for the selected images can be toggled “ON/OFF” by pressing the [Settings] key. The protect mark ( ) will be appended to identify the protected images. * Print marks can be appended to a maximum of 50 images. If an attempt is made to append the print mark to the 51st image, a print mark error will occur and setting will not be possible. 7-16-7 Image Erase The following method can be used to erase unwanted images. There are two image erase methods. One method is used after card recording has ended. In the other method, only images selected by using card review are erased while a card is still being used. Image Erasure after Card Recording has Ended (1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode. When the still images are displayed, press the [Menu] key to open the “Card play” menu screenh and select the “Cart Executeh” sub-menu. (2) On the “Card Execute” sub-menu, select “Image Erase”. (3) When “Image Erase” is selected, “Cancel/Erase One Image/Erase All” will appear. Select the desired item and then press the [Settings] key. a) To abort image erase, select “Cancel” and press the [Settings] key. b) To erase individual images after confirmation, select “Erase One Image” and then press the [Settings] key. When Erase One Image is selected and set, the screen will change and the message “Erase This Image?” plus a “Yes” / ”No” box will appear. To erase the displayed image, select “Yes” and then press the [Settings] key. To erase a different image, use the Card [+] and [-] keys to display the image to be erased, select Yes and then press the [Settings] key to execute the erasure. To end erasing, select No and then press the [Settings] key. The menu in upper hierarchy will return. In the case of protected images, the Protect Mark ( ) will be displayed at the top center of the screen, “Yes” will be displayed in purple and setting will be disabled. In order to erase a protected image, it is necessary to first return to the “Protect Setting screen” described above c) To erase all of the images, select “Erase All” and then press the [Settings] key and then press the Settings key. When Erase All is selected and set, the screen will change and the message “Erase All Images?” plus a “Yes” / ”No” box will appear. To erase all of the displayed images, select Yes and then press the [Settings] key. To abort erasing, select No and then press the [Settings] key. Even if an attempt is made to erase all images, protected images will not be erased. 1-54 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-16-8 Format Format is executed for new cards, when the “Card Error” warning appears, and when all of the images and files on a card are to be erased. Use the following method to execute Format. (1) Select the “Card Execute” menu in the same way as in item (1) in image protection setting described above. (2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select "Format" and then press the [Settings] key. (3) “Cancel/Execute” box will appear. To execute formatting, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key. To cancel formatting, select the “Cancel” key and then press the [Settings] key. (4) When Execute has been selected and executed, the message “Format This Card?” will appear together with a “Yes/No” box. To continue with formatting, select “Yes” and then press the [Settings] key. To cancel formatting, select “Cancel” key and press the [Settings] key. * Use caution because the following images and files will be erased by formatting. • Protected images • Previously recorded card mix sample images • Images and files from other equipment or PC 7-16-9 Card Review When [– / ] key is pressed on the Card recording mode, the “Card still image check” display will appear and the mode will be changed to the Card Still Image Check mode. For the still images read out, the “Image Protect ” or “Delete One Image” operation is available. To cancel the mode, select “Return” with the multi-dial. The mode will return to ordinary mode after images are deleted. * If the card contains no image or the card is an SD memory card protected, you can not move to the Card review mode. 7-16-10 Image Setting If the multi-dial is pressed during card (single) playback, the mode will be changed to the Image setting mode and the “Image Setting” display will appear. For the still images read out, the “Image Protect ”, “Print Mark Setting”, or “Delete One Image” operation is available. Image settings can be canceled by selecting “Return” on the multi-dial. * If the card contains no image, you can not move to the Image setting mode. * In the case of an SE memory card protected, the mode can be changed to the Image setting mode, but the operation menu items above are displayed in purple and disabled. 1-55 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT 7-16-11 Forward Skip for Card Playback If you press and hold the card “+” (or “–”) button during card playback (single playback), you can quickly go to the desired card image. On the card counter display of “display no./total count”, the display no. will be changed while you press and hold the button, and the image when you release the button will be read out and displayed * If the display no. exceeds the total count during card feeding, the display no. will restart from 1. * If the display no. gets smaller than “1”, the display no. will restart reversely from total count. Card Related Cautions for All Modes * Cautions • When the red “>>>>” mark (this mark is white “ ” in the Mirror Photo mode/Memory mode and in the Line Out screen) is blinking facing toward the Card mark (>>>>), this means that the card is being written, so never remove the card, disconnect the battery pack or AC power cord at this time. Such actions can damage the images being recording (marking readout and playback impossible) or even damage all of the images already recorded on the card. • When the green “<<<<” mark is blinking facing away from the Card mark ( should never be removed at this time. ), data is being read from the card, so the card • Always turn the Power switch to the “OFF” position before inserting or ejecting a card. 1-56 CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION CONTENTS 1. P.C.B Functions -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1 2. Power Supply Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3 2-1 Startup of Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3 2-2 Power Fuses ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 2-3 Power Supply Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5 3. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6 3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6 3-2 Camera, Card Signal Processing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 3-3 Recorder Signal Processing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9 3-4 Audio Signal Flow ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10 4. System Control, Servo ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11 4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11 4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-12 4-3 Servo Control ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-12 4-4 Error Detection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13 4-4-1 Error Detecting Conditions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13 4-4-2 Processing after Error Detection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13 4-5 IC Terminal Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14 4-5-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-14 4-5-2 MAIN MI-COM (IC100) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-17 4-5-3 SUB MI-COM (IC203) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-21 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 1. P.C.B Functions (1) MAIN P.C.B. System-Control Section • IC100 • IC101 MAIN MI-COM RESET : Servo, Video, Audio Control, System Control : MAIN MI-COM reset • IC200 • IC201 E3V REG&RESET EEPROM : E3V regulator, MODE MI-COM reset : EEPROM for recorder data • IC202 • IC203 LANC INTERFACE SUB MI-COM : LANC interface : Power Supply Control, Clock Camera Section • IC1101 DIC4 : Camera digital signal processing • IC1102 • IC1104,5 SDRAM AND : Memory for DIC4 : AND gate for control signal • IC1106 • IC1301 INVERTER 4.0V REGULATOR : Inverter amplifier for clock : 4.0V regulator • IC1302,3 • IC1304 OPE AMP MOTOR DRIVER : Operational amplifier for IRIS control : AF/PZ motor drive • IC1401 • IC1402 CAMERA MI-COM RESET : AE, AWB, AF, EIS, DE control : CAMERA MI-COM reset • IC1403 • IC1404 EEPROM EVR (D/A CONVERTER) : EEPROM for camera data : (EVR)D/A converter for camera adjustment CVF Section • IC1501 EVR (D/A CONVERTER) : D/A converter for EVR of EVF section EVF DRIVER SWITCH : EVF LCD (CVF) drive : EVF display character mixing switch Video Section • IC2000 VRP2 : Recording/Playback head amplifier • IC2100 • IC2301 VIF2 VIC2 : Analog video input/output signal processing : Digital VCR signal processing LSI + SDRAM • IC2302 • IC2600 AND CHARACTER GENERATOR : AND gate for control signal : Character generator for LCD, EVF display INVERTER : Inverter amplifier for clock • IC3201 • IC3202 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power supply PWM regulator controller : Power supply PWM regulator controller • IC3203 • IC3219 4.7V REGULATOR 2.8V REGULATOR : 4.7V regulator for video, audio, digital control : 2.8V regulator (MC model only) FLASH : Memory for card firmware • IC4001 • IC4002 V53 SDRAM : Card control : Memory for SIC signal processing • IC4003 SIC : Card video processing, Card interface • IC1502 • IC1503 • IC2601 PM Section Card Section • IC4000 2-1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (2) SUB P.C.B. Servo Section • IC300 • FL300 MOTOR DRIVE 5.6V REGULATOR : Drum, Capstan, Loading motor drive : 5.6V regulator for motor drive • Remote control light receptor, tally lamp Gyro Section • IC1601 • IC1602 P SENSOR GYRO Y SENSOR GYRO : Pitch direction angular velocity detection : Yaw direction angular velocity detection • IC1603 • IC1605 SW OPE AMP : Switch for gyro sensor output reset : Operational amplifier for gyro sensor output signal TIMING GENERATOR : Timing generator for CCD drive CDS/AGC/AD VCO PLL : CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter : Camera clock phase lock (3) CA P.C.B. Camera Section • IC1001 • IC1003 • IC1005 • IC1006 INVERTER • IC1007,8,9 AND : Inverter amplifier for clock : AND gate for clock voltage conversion (4) CCD P.C.B. • IC1000 CCD : CCD image sensor OPE AMP : Operational amplifier for microphone • IC801 • IC802 AUDIO INTERFACE A/D,D/A CONVERTER : Analog input/output signal processing : Audio signal A/D,D/A conversion • IC803 5.0V REGULATOR : 5.0V regulator (5) AUDIO P.C.B. • IC701 (6) LCD P.C.B. • IC901 • IC902 • IC4201 EEPROM : EEPROM for LCD data LCD INTERFACE DC/DC CONVERTER : LCD signal processing, drive : Backlight drive (7) CVF P.C.B. Signal relay from MAIN P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, Backlight LED illumination (8) MULTI P.C.B. Connector for Docking unit (DU-300) (9) LI P.C.B. Backup lithium battery terminal, Power LED, START/STOP SW (10) MMC P.C.B. Connector for card insertion 2-2 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 2. Power Supply Circuit 2-1 Startup of Power Supply FE FPC CN11 CN14 24 LI3V CN1 3 6 25 CN13 15 SW0 4 17 EJECT SW SW1 1 SW2 2 MAIN DIAL MMC P.C.B. 1 10 26, 27 8 CN200 VTR UNREG 3 LI P.C.B. LITHIUM BATTERY MAIN DIAL SW0 SW1 SW2 L H CARD PLAY H L H L VCR H H L OFF H L L MOVIE H L H P.SCAN L L H CARD REC MAIN P.C.B. FROM BATTERY TP204 7 MAIN SW0 26 TP202 3V REG. 8 E3V MAIN SW1 25 PM SECTION TP203 DET 4 E3V DET 4 MAIN SW2 24 VTR ON CAM ON 3V 6 SW EJECT SW 21 43 VCC E3V or LI3V RESET 5 15 RESET L 2.6V DET. 2 23 LI3 DET CASSETTE 20 IN SW FROM DMC II 137 CAM ON VTR ON 48 IC200 E 3V REG. RESET IC203 SUB MI-COM. SERIAL DATA IC100 MAIN MI-COM. Fig. 2-1 • Lithium Battery for Backup LI3V from the lithium battery is input at pin 3 of IC200, then output from pin 6 as power supply for the SUB MI-COM. This allows the SUB MI-COM to provide data backup and a clock function when main power supply is not connected. If the lithium battery voltage drops below 2.6V (or even when lithium battery is not mounted), IC200 outputs an “L” signal from pin 2, and when power is ON, the SUB MI-COM receives the “L” signal and sends it to the MAIN MI-COM, which provides a warning indication for the lithium battery. • Main Power Supply VTR UNREG from the main power supply enters pin 7 of IC200, is converted to 3V by the internal regulator, and is then output as E3V from pin 8. The signal is also replaced with LI3V by the internal switch and then output from pin 6 as power supply to the SUB MI-COM. Upon receiving VTR UNREG, IC200 outputs “L” signal from pin 4. SUB MI-COM receives this and recognizes that the main power supply is connected, then carries out initialization of the mechanisms after which it enters a standby status. In this condition, SUB MI-COM performs detection of switches related to startup, and outputs VTR ON “H” signal from pin 48 upon detection. By means of VTR ON signal, the recorder power supply is started up and the MAIN MI-COM is also started. If camera mode has been selected, the MAIN MI-COM receives this signal from the SUB MI-COM and outputs CAM ON “H” signal which starts up the camera power supply. 2-3 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 2-2 Power Fuses MAIN P.C.B. TP3201, 2 FROM 9 BATTERY TERMINAL 1 FU3201 14 BATT + + 6 BATT − − TP3203, 4 1 2 4 3 1 2 4 3 UNREG (VS) UNREG (DC/DC) VTR UNREG UNREG (3V) FU3202 Fig. 2-2 Power from the battery is divided into four systems by FU3201,2 on MAIN P.C.B. (1) UNREG (VS) : FU3201 DRUM/CAPSTAN VS, 5V system power supply, Lens motor, Recorder motor driver, CVF backlight power supply (2) UNREG (DC/DC) : FU3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL IC power supply (3) VTR UNREG : FU3202 1.7V system power supply, CCD -6.5V/15V, LCD12V, E3V, LANC, LCD backlight power supply (4) UNREG (3V) : FU3202 2.3V system, 3V system power supply 2-4 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 2-3 Power Supply Circuit Figure 2-3 shows the various power supply circuits. The ON/OFF of each power supply is controlled by VTR ON output from SUB MI-COM and CAM ON output from MAIN MI-COM. 39 PWM IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL UNREG (VS) 46 1 IN REG. Q3202 CH-1 IC3203 4.7V REG. OUT 2 DVDD 4.7V HA 4.7V MO 5V IC3219 2.8V REG. 5 IN 36 PWM UNREG (3V) 50 REG. Q3216 CH-2 OUT 4 ON 1 Q3201, 5 DIF 2.8V HA3.0V, DVDD 3.0V, A3.0V, CARD 3.0V, LCD 3.0V CAM 3.0V 33 UNREG (3V) CAM 2.3V Q3227 PWM 56 AVDD 2.3V, DVDD 2.3V REG. Q3204 CH-3 19 VTR UNREG 29 ON/OFF PWM 30 ON/OFF 57 REG. Q3203 CH-4 DVDD 1.7V, DIC 1.7V VTR ON 4 3 CH2 ON CH3 ON CAM ON 6 ON/OFF IC3202 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL 21 VTR ON VTR UNREG PWM 10 REG. Q3213 CH-1 19 LCD 12V CAM ON VTR UNREG PWM Q3209, 10 (1/2) 11 Q3208, 10 (2/2) REG. Q3212 CH-2 CCD 15V 16 VTR UNREG PWM CH-3 13 REG. Q3211, 14 Fig.2-3 2-5 CCD -6.5V ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3. Signal Processing Circuit 3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit Figure 2-4 shows the overall block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals. CCD P.C.B. CA P.C.B. IC1000 CCD IC1003 CDS AGC A/D LENS MAIN P.C.B. IC1101 DIC4 IC1102 SDRAM IC1001 TG MC model only IC2301 REC/PB HEAD Card MMC P.C.B. IC4002 SDRAM IC4003 SIC VIC2 IC2000 VRP2 JACK FPC DV VIDEO AV IC2600 CG IC2100 VIF2 IC902 LCD DRIVER AUDIO P.C.B. AUDIO IC801 AIF LCD P.C.B. IC802 A/D, D/A SDRAM IC1502 EVF DRIVER LCD CVF LCD MIC Fig. 2-4 2-6 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3-2 Camera, Card Signal Processing CH-1 IC1003 CDS /AGC /AD IC1000 CCD 36MHz IC4003 SIC A DATA SW IC1001 DIC4 CH-2 B DATA SW 10bit 36MHz 8bit 27MHz TO IC2301 VIC 8bit 27MHz TRANSACTION IC1102 SDRAM IC4001 V53 : ANALOG Card : DIGITAL IC4002 SDRAM MC model only Fig. 2-5 (1) Camera <CCD> IC1000 • 1/4 inch • Primary color filter • 680,000 pixels (including electronic IS area) • All pixel readout • Single-line double-speed readout : Readout clock is set for double speed, and both odd and even parts are read out in a single field period (progressive mode). <CDS/AGC/AD> IC1003 Signal read out from CCD is subjected to sample hold, AGC processing, A/D conversion, and then output as a digital signal. <DIC4> IC1101 Carries out Y/C separation, various camera signal processing (EIS, AWB, etc.), and digital effect processing. Since, at playback, digital effect processing is applied to the playback signal, CH-2 is for input and CH-1 for output. <SDRAM> IC1102 Field memory for signal processing, digital effect. (2) Card (MC model only) <SIC> IC4003 When the card function is not operated, camera signal is sent directly to VIC2. • Video signal capture function • Video signal switch (card mix function) • JPEG compression/decompression • Image enlargement/reduction • Card interface <SDRAM> IC4002 Image data memory used at Card write-in, readout. <V53> IC4001 A CPU for the card circuit, which executes firmware located in the flash memory (IC4000), communicates with the MAIN MICOM via SIC, and conducts various card processing through control of SIC. 2-7 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Card Recording (CAMERA) (1) DIC4 captures image initially for matching recorded image with image displayed on LCD. (2) SIC stores image in SDRAM (IC4002). (3) SIC applies JPEG compression to image, and starts writing into Card. (4) VIC2 captures image and DIC4 releases the capture function. (5) DIC4 starts camera signal processing, and provides movie image display. (6) When SIC finishes write-in to Card, VIC2 releases the capture function. Card Recording (VCR, DV input) (1) VIC2 captures image. (2) By way of SIC (B DATA) and DIC4 (CH-2), SIC again stores in SDRAM (IC4002) the image captured in SIC (CH-1). (3) SIC applies JPEG compression to the image, and starts writing into Card. (4) When SIC finishes write-in to Card, VIC2 releases the capture function. (At playback/recording: Image from VIC2 appearing at LCD and video output is A DATA image via SIC, DIC4.) (At DV input: Image from VIC2 appearing at LCD and video output is the image captured at (1).) Card Playback (1) SIC decompresses the Card file. (2) SIC stores an image in SDRAM (IC4002). (3) VIC2 captures an image (A DATA) and outputs it at LCD and video output. Card Mixing The selected image that has been decompressed at Card and stored in SDRAM (IC4002) is mixed with the camera image via the switch in SIC. In progressive mode : A DATA and B DATA are mixed with card image. In interline movie mode : A DATA is mixed with card image. 2-8 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3-3 Recorder Signal Processing SDRAM IC1001 DIC4 (ELURA10) SDRAM INTERFACE DIF INTERFACE DV TERMINAL VIDEO HEAD A DATA IC4003 SIC (ELURA20 MC) B DATA IC2100 VIF2 AV JACK S TERMINAL VIDEO INTERFACE D/A A/D COMPRESSION /DEMOD. ECC BUS REC/PB PROCESS IC2000 VRP2 AUDIO INTERFACE IC802 A/D D/A AV JACK IC2301 VIC2 CVF LCD IC1502 EVF DRIVER R,G,B LCD Fig. 2-6 < VIC2 >IC2301 • Includes an A/D converter for analog line input plus a Y/C separation filter. • D/A output for VRP2 control is added. • A/B DATA: input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIC4 digital effect circuit is used at playback.) The video data and signals input to VIC2 are subjected to digital VTR format signal processing. Audio data, subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC2, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of DV format. • DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital input, the data enters VIC2 signal processing circuit via the opposite route. < VRP2 >IC2000 • Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC2 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC2. < VIF2 >IC2100 • Related parts are reduced in comparison to conventional VIF, and a sync separation function for analog line input is added. Y and C signals sent from VIC2 are output as Y, C signals for S terminal (DU-300) and composite video. At line input, input signals undergo level adjustment, sync signal separation and are output to VIC2. < EVF DRIVER >IC1502 EVF driver, formerly mounted on CVF P.C.B., has been moved to MAIN P.C.B., and displays on CVF LCD an image based on R, G, B and sync signals from VIC2. 2-9 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 3-4 Audio Signal Flow MIC IC701 L AMP C R L L L R R R L L L R R L R EXT. MIC R AV JACK R IC2301 VIC2 IC2000 VRP2 REC/PB HEAD IC801 AIF L HEAD PHONE R IC802 A/D D/A L+R L + SPEAKER AMP - SPEAKER BEEP LEV CAMERA MI-COM BEEP CONT. SHUTTER BEEP 1 MAIN MI-COM BEEP 2 Q803, 4 Fig. 2-7 <MIC AMP> IC701 Processing is applied to output signal of microphone element C whereby it is mixed with L and R signals. The former nondirectional microphone is thus changed to a stereo microphone having directivity < AIF >IC801 Carries out switching between internal and external microphones (by means of serial data from MAIN MI-COM), plus ALC (Auto Level Control), and amplification of each output signal. Also, the shutter sound at card recording from the CAMERA MI-COM and the beep tone issued at ejection from the MAIN MICOM are added to the speaker output signal in AIF. < A/D,D/A >IC802 Carries out analog - digital signal conversion. Sampling frequency is output from VIC2 and is Fs=32 KHz or Fs=48 KHz depending on the audio mode. Quantization bit number is 12 bits in case of 32 KHz or 16 bits in case of 48 KHz. 2-10 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4. System Control, Servo 4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo Figure 2-8 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is mainly performed by the MAIN MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN P.C.B. MC model only CA P.C.B. LENS MAIN P.C.B. SUB P.C.B. DMC II Card IC300 MOTOR DRIVER IC1001 TG FG/PG IC4001 V53 CAPSTAN IC230 VIC2 IC4003 SIC M CAPSTAN DRIVER DFG/PG IC1101 DIC4 M DRUM DRIVER PWM C IC1304 MOTOR DRIVER DRUM IC3201 D-VS DC/DC C-VS CONVERTER PWM D IC1003 CDS AGC A/D FG CFG IC1404 EVR ZOOM SW IC1403 EEPROM IC1401 CAMERA MI-COM IC1501 EVR IC901 EEPROM IC902 LCD DRIVER LCD P.C.B. IC1502 EVF DRIVER LOADING LOADING DRIVER IC2600 CG IC201 EEPROM M MODE SW C.DOWN SW BOT/EOT SENS. DEW REEL FG IC100 MAIN MI-COM MIC DIAL SW IC200 VRP2 CAMERA KEY HEAD R-KEY EJECT SW IC203 SUB MI-COM IC2100 VIF2 IC801 AIF AUDIO P.C.B. MAIN DIAL IC202 LANC I/F MULTI JACK MMC P.C.B. DOCKING UNIT DU-300 LANC JACK Fig. 2-8 2-11 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer (1) MAIN MI-COM (IC100) The MAIN MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through communication with CAMERA MI-COM. It also detects the input of various sensors and switches (DMCII). Following are the major functions. • VIC2 (Video IC) control/VIF2 (Video Interface) control/AIF (Audio Interface) control • Control in accordance with IEEE1394 • Key input • LANC communication • LCD control • OSD (On Screen Display) control • DMCII mechanism control (2) SUB MI-COM (IC203) The SUB MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions. • Key input • Remote control input • Power ON/OFF control • MIC (Memory In Cassette) control (3) CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401) Carries out lens control and camera signal processing. Following are the major functions. • CCD drive control • AE, AF, AWB control • EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control • Zoom key input 4-3 Servo Control Servo control is made by the MAIN MI-COM. and VIC2 the same as heretofore. The MAIN MI-COM. controls motor ON/OFF, turning direction, etc. and VIC2 controls the speed of revolution, phase and outputs the signal. The signal flow is such that VIC2 detects the FG/PG, PB-RF, etc. from motor and send them to the MAIN MI-COM. The MAIN MI-COM generates the error signal and outputs it to the VIC2 again. The VIC2 outputs the error signal (PWM), and the MAIN P.C.B. drives that signal and sends it to the motor driver IC as a control voltage. 2-12 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4-4 Error Detection If an anomaly has been produced in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD indicates “Please unload the cassette” and blinks “EJECT.” 4-4-1 Error Detecting Conditions The following table gives error detecting conditions. Kind Drum error Condition Detection Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG FG frequency when steady 900Hz Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%. Steady : 30% max. Error detecting time Starting : 5sec. Error detecting mode Starting / steady FG frequency when steady 1347Hz Error detecting level Starting : 80% max. Steady : 0.5sec. Capstan error C-FG Steady : 100Hz max. Error detecting time Starting : 2sec. Steady : 0.5sec. Reel error Error detecting mode Error detection Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG Normally : C-FG number per reel FG cycle is C-FG 2.4×1347 or more. UNLOAD : Reel FG half cycle is 1 sec or more (Take-up reel only for both) Loading error Error detecting mode M ode transfer Error detection M ode transfer time M ode SW STANDBY-STOP : 6sec STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec STOP-PLAY : 3sec 4-4-2 Processing after Error Detection The following table gives processing after error detection. During loading Loading completed During tape running Cassette in Loading During mode Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop • Pop up : Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear • Error stop : Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED) 2-13 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4-5 IC Terminal Functions 4-5-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401) PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION 1 VCC 2 CG STB O CG strobe output (for development/plant use) 3 I ISW O Bypass capacitor charging SW (for Gyro output) - O Unused 4,5 6 REMARKS PG BK ADDR DATA BIT 5 0 9027 5 5 0 9022 0 CAM 2.3V VCCB1 CAM 3V 7 VSSB1 8 ADJ SW I (Pull up) for plant adjustment GND 9 ADJ CS O CS for plant adjustment 5 0 9022 1 10 NT XPL SEL I Camera microcomputer NTSC/PAL selection 5 0 9022 2 11 TG NP SEL O TG NTSC/PAL selection (connect to /NPSEL of TG) 5 0 9022 3 12 TG SEN O TG serial communication enable signal 5 0 9022 4 13 X TG RST O TG reset signal 5 0 9022 5 14 DA LOAD O D/A load pulse (to LD of MB88347L) 5 0 9022 6 15 X AGC CS O AGC chip select 5 0 9022 7 16 VCCB1 17 VSSB1 18 IRIS CL 19 IRIS OP O Unused 20 X IRIS GAIN O Iris gain 5 0 9023 2 21 LED RET O Lens LED illumination 5 0 9023 3 4 CAM 3V GND O Unused 22 X F PSV O Focus power save 5 0 9023 23 X Z PSV O Zoom power save 5 0 9023 5 24 F RES SW I Focus reset detection (Pull Down) 5 0 9023 6 25 Z RES SW I Zoom reset detection (Pull Down) 5 0 9023 7 26 X PC CS O For AF debugging 5 0 9024 0 27 CAM DIC RST O CAM DIC RST (to MODE) 5 0 9024 1 28 X PC ACK I/O For AF debug/WB debug 5 0 9024 2 29 X DIC4 RST O Unused 5 0 9024 3 30 EEP INI I EEPROM initialization (Pull Up) 5 0 9024 4 31 X EEP CS O EEPROM chip select (to CS)(Pull Up) 5 0 9024 5 32 X EEP WP O EEPROM write protect (to WC)(Pull Up) 5 0 9024 6 33 EEP RB I EEPROM READY/BUSY (to R/B) 5 0 9024 7 5 0 9025 0 34 VCCB1 CAM 3V 35 VSSB1 GND 36 CAM CS 37 38 O SUB MI-COM communication CS DIC4 RST DET I From Mode DIC4 RST OUT 5 0 9025 1 CAM RX O SUB MI-COM send/receive discrimination signal 5 0 9025 2 39 DIC CS O DIC CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 3 40 FIC CS O FIC CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 4 41 PWM CS O PWM CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 5 42 DIC READ O DIC data read (Pull Down) 5 0 9025 6 43 FID I Field index input (From DIC) 5 0 9025 7 44 TEST1 TEST OUT1 45 TEST2 TEST OUT2 46 TEST3 TEST OUT3 2-14 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION PIN 47 NAME I/O WB SET FUNCTION VCCB1 CAM 3V 49 - Unused 50 VSSB1 GND 51 VSS GND 52~65 - 67,8 69 70,1 72 CAM 3V - Unused VSS GND - SCLK3 ADDR DATA BIT 5 0 902B 3 5 0 902A 1 5 0 9029 7 5 0 9029 4 Unused O PWM output (for shutter sound) O TG/AGC/DA serial clock 73~79 80 BK Unused VCCP Shutter Audio PG WB SET (for debug) 48 66 REMARKS Unused 81 SDI3 I Unused 82 SDO3 O TG/AGC/DA serial data send 83 - 84 MtoC SCLK Unused I SUB serial clock 85 MtoC DATA I SUB serial data receive 5 0 9029 3 86 CtoM DATA O SUB serial data send 5 0 9029 2 87 - Unused 88 VCCP CAM 3V 89 90,1 VSSP GND - Unused 92 DIC SCLK1 O DIC serial clock 5 0 9028 7 93 DtoC DATA1 I DIC serial data receive 5 0 9028 6 CtoD DATA1 O DIC serial data send 5 0 9028 5 94 95,6 - Unused 97 SCLK0 O EEPROM serial clock 5 0 9028 2 98 SDI0 I EEPROM serial data receive 5 0 9028 1 O EEPROM serial data send 5 0 9028 0 99 SDO0 100 VCC 101 VCCP 102 JTAG 103 TDO FP (JTAG terminal) 104 TDI Pull Up (JTAG terminal) CAM 2.3V CAM 3V I FP (JTAG terminal)(Pull Up) 105 TMS Pull Up (JTAG terminal) 106 TRCLK Unused 107 EVENT0 Unused 108 EVENT1 Unused 109 TCK FP (JTAG terminal) 110 TRST# Connect to reset IC output 111 VSSP GND 112 FP Pull Down (flash protect) 113 MODE2 GND 114 MODE1 GND 115 MODE0 MCU mode fixed (Pull Down) 116 FVCC CAM 2.3V (flash erase program) 117 VSS GND 118 RESET Connect to reset IC output 2-15 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION PIN 119 NAME I/O FUNCTION REMARKS PG BK ADDR DATA BIT GND 120 OSCVCC CAM 2.3V (=VCC) 121 XIN Main clock input 122 OSCVSS 123 XOUT 124 PLLVCC CAM 2.3V 125 PLLCAP PLL condenser connection 126 PLLVSS GND O Main clock output Connect to GND 127,8 - Unused 129 VSSB0 GND 130 VCCB0 CAM 3V 131 CAM SS TIM2 O Slow shutter timing signal (to Mode) 5 0 9021 5 132 CAM SS TIM1 O Slow shutter timing signal (to Mode) 5 0 9021 4 5 0 902C 0 5 0 902C 2 Yaw direction gyro input 5 0 32DE,32DF Pitch direction gyro input 5 0 32E0,32E1 133~139 - Unused 140 VCCP CAM 3V 141 VSSP 142 SBI I System break interrupt (Pull Down) 143 X VD I VD signal (from DIC) 144 - 145 CAM REQ GND Unused I M to C mode microcomputer communication request (Pull Down) 146 X PC REQ I/O 147 ADJ REQ I 148,9 150 VCC 151 VSS For AF debug/WB debug (for development) For plant adjustment (Pull Down) Unused CAM 2.3V GND 152~156 - Unused 157 VCCP CAM 3V 158 VSSP GND 159~176 177 XCIN 178 VSSR 179 XCOUT Unused CAM 2.3V GND (real time clock GND) O Unused 180 VCCR CAM 3V (real time clock power supply) 181 AVREF A/D reference voltage input (connect to CAM 3V) 182 AVCC 183 Y GYRO I A/D power supply input (connect to CAM 3V) 184 P GYRO I 185,6 - Connect to GND 187 I ENC I Iris encoder AD input 5 0 188 ZOOM KEY I Zoom key AD input 5 0 2B95 189 TM SENS I Temperature compensation AD input (Pull Down) 5 0 3136 190 - 191~198 199 AVSS Connect to GND Unused Connect to GND 2-16 2DC8,2C9H ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4-5-2 MAIN MI-COM (IC100) PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION REMARKS PG BK ADDR DATA BIT 1 VCC DVDD 2.2V 2 VIF CS O VIF chip select 7 2 D7 3 3 XECSV O VIC2 (VIC CS) chip select 7 2 D7 2 4 XECSI O VIC2 (DIF CS) chip select 7 2 D7 1 5 OPT CS O OPT chip select (for factory adjustment) 7 2 D7 0 6 VCCB BUS power supply = DVDD3V 7 VSSB BUS GND 8 MIRR O Panel OSD OFF during mirror mode 7 2 D2 7 9 BEEP LEVEL O Warning buzzer level control 7 2 D2 6 10 SIC RESET O SIC RESET 7 2 D2 5 11 SIC BBUSSEL O SIC B data bus input/output control 7 2 D2 4 12 SIC PSB O SIC power save 7 2 D2 3 13 MMC ON O MMC power ON/OFF control (fixed at ON) 7 2 D2 2 14 SIC CS O SIC chip select 7 2 D2 1 15 VCO HI O VRP VCO power save 7 2 D2 0 16 VCCB Bus power supply = DVDD3V 17 VSSB Bus GND 18 XRESET O VIC initial signal 7 2 D3 7 19 EADDR6 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 6 20 EADDR5 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 5 21 EADDR4 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 4 22 EADDR3 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 3 23 EADDR2 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 2 24 EADDR1 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 1 25 EADDR0 O Address bus LSB (VIC2) 7 2 D3 0 26 EDATA15 I/O Data bus MSB (VIC2) 7 2 D4 7 27 EDATA14 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 6 28 EDATA13 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 5 29 EDATA12 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 4 30 EDATA11 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 3 31 EDATA10 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 2 32 EDATA9 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 1 33 EDATA8 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 0 34 VCCB Bus power supply = DVDD3V 35 VSSB Bus GND 36 EDATA7 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 7 37 EDATA6 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 6 38 EDATA5 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 5 39 EDATA4 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 4 40 EDATA3 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 3 41 EDATA2 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 2 42 EDATA1 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 1 43 EDATA0 I/O Data bus LSB (VIC2) 7 2 D5 0 44 VIC XERD O VIC2 7 2 D6 3 45 VIC XEWR O VIC2 7 2 D6 2 46 WIDE CONT O S1 signal control output 7 2 D6 1 47 LINE IN O LINE input circuit control 7 2 D6 4 48 VCCB Bus power supply = DVDD3V 49 BCLK Check pad 7 2 D6 0 50 VSSB GND 2-17 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION REMARKS PG BK ADDR DATA BIT 51 VSS GND 52 CAM RX DATA I Camera communication data discrimination 7 2 DD 3 53 DIC2S FI I DIC shrink FI (not used) 7 2 DD 2 54 CAM SS TMG1 I Camera still picture control 1 input 7 2 DD 1 55 CAM SS TMG2 I Camera still picture control 2 input 7 2 DD 0 56 PHOTO SW I Memory switch full pressing detection input 7 2 DE 7 57 HALF PHOTO SW I Memory switch half pressing detection input 7 2 DE 6 58 START/STOP I Trigger switch input 7 2 DE 5 59 PAE/GREEN SW I PAE mode select switch detection input 7 2 DE 4 60 PANEL OPEN SW I Panel open switch detection input 7 2 DE 3 61 PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SW I Panel BOTTOM/TOP switch detection input 7 2 DE 2 62 CASSETTE IN SW I CASSETTE IN switch detection input 7 2 DE 1 63 REC PROOF SW I Record inhibit switch detection input 7 2 DE 0 64 DIAL CW SW I Dial detection input 7 2 DF 7 65 DIAL CCW SW I Dial detection input 7 2 DF 6 66 VCCP 67 AIF CS O AIF2 chip select output 7 2 DB 0 68 EXT CONT O External microphone detection output 7 2 DB 1 69 VSSP DVDD3V GND 70 PD DA O Audio DA power save control 7 2 DB 2 71 PD AD O Audio AD power save control 7 2 DB 3 72 A MUTE O Audio mute 7 2 DB 4 73 A EMP2 O Audio emphasis setting 7 2 DB 5 74 A EMP1 O Audio emphasis setting 7 2 DB 6 75 AUD ON O Speaker/headphones power supply control 7 2 DB 7 76 BUZZER CARRIER2 O Buzzer 2 output 7 2 DA 0 77 BUZZER CARRIER1 O Buzzer 1 output 7 2 DA 1 78 RESERVE2 I V53 firmware update status detection 7 2 DA 2 79 TEST1 For factory adjustment 7 2 DA 3 80 EVF SENS O IC chip select for EVF drive 7 2 DA 6 81 LANC IN I LANC data input 7 2 DA 7 82 LANC OUT O LANC data output 7 2 D9 0 83 EVF DA LOAD O DA converter load for EVF 7 2 D9 1 84 AIF/VIF/SUB SCK I/O Serial clock (AIF/VIF/SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 3 85 SUB SI I Serial bus data input (SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 4 86 AIF/VIF/SUB SO O Serial bus data output (AIF/VIF/SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 5 87 PANEL IC CS O LCD interface chip select output 7 2 D9 2 88 VCCP 89 VSSP DVDD3V 90 PANEL EEPROM CS O LCD EEPROM chip select output 7 2 D9 6 91 MAIN EEPROM CS O EEPROM chip select output 7 2 D9 7 92 OSD/EEPROM/DA SCK O OSDC/EEPROM/LCD EEPROM/DA/EVFIC/LCDIC 7 2 D8 0 93 EEPROM SI I Serial data input (EEPROM/LCD EEPROM) 7 2 D8 1 94 OSD/EEPROM/DA SO O OSD/EEPROM/LCD EEPROM/DA/EVFIC/LCD 7 2 D8 2 GND Data output 95 DIC4 CONT O DIC4 control output 7 2 D8 3 96 DIC4 CS O DIC4 chip select output 7 2 D8 4 97 CAM/DIC4/SIC SCK I Serial clock input (CAMERA MI-COM/DIC4/SIC) 7 2 D8 5 98 CAM/SIC SI I Serial data input (CAMERA MI-COM/SIC) 7 2 D8 6 O Serial clock output (CAMERA MI-COM/DIC4/SIC) 7 2 D8 7 99 CAM/DIC4/SIC SO 100 VCC DVDD2.2V 101 VCCP DVDD3V 2-18 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION PIN I/O FUNCTION EMULATOR I 10K pull up (FP) emulator (for factory adjustment) 103 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH O FP (for factory adjustment) 104 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH I 10K pull up (for factory adjustment) 102 NAME 105 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH I 10K pull up (for factory adjustment) 106 EMULATOR O FP (emulator) (for factory adjustment) 107 EMULATOR O FP (emulator) (for factory adjustment) 108 EMULATOR O FP (emulator) (for factory adjustment) 109 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH I 10K pull up (for factory adjustment) 110 JTAG/EMULATOR I 10K pull down (for factory adjustment) I 10K pull down 111 VSSP 112 FLASH 113 GND 114 GND GND 115 MODE 10K pull down (for factory adjustment) 116 EMULATOR/FLASH 10K pull down (for factory adjustment) 117 VSS GND 118 REST IN Reset signal input 119 VSS GND REMARKS PG BK ADDR DATA BIT GND (This terminal is open in the mask version.) 120 OSCVCC 121 XIN 122 OSCVSS 123 XOUT GND DVDD2.3V I 20 MHz O 20 MHz GND 124 PLLCVCC DVDD2.3V 125 PLLCAP External capacitor for PLL is connected to this terminal 126 PLLVSS 127 OSDC CS O OSDC IC chip select output 7 2 D1 0 128 OSDC RESET O OSDC reset output 7 2 D1 1 129 VSSB GND GND 130 VCCB 131 - O DVDD3V Unused 7 2 D1 2 132 - O Unused 7 2 D1 3 133 - O Unused 7 2 D1 4 134 FCHO I Factory process mode/soft debug terminal 0 7 2 D0 0 (for factory adjustment) 135 - O Unused 7 2 D1 5 136 CAM M RST I CAMERA MI-COM reset output 7 2 D0 1 137 CAM PW ON O Camera power supply control 7 2 D1 6 138 DA CFG O DA CFG (for factory adjustment) 7 2 DA 5 139 LET CONT O S1 signal letter box output 7 2 DA 4 140 VCCP 141 VSSP 142 N.C I 7 2 E1 4 143 XINT M I VIC RP CAPTURE interrupt request input 7 2 DC 7 144 XINT D I VIC DIF interrupt request input 7 2 DC 6 145 XINT C I VIC SDRAM interrupt request input 7 2 DC 5 146 SUB REQ O Communication request input to SUB MI-COM 7 2 DC 4 147 SUB CS I Selection input from SUB MI-COM 7 2 DC 3 148 SIC REQ O Communication request to SIC 7 2 DC 2 149 RESERVE1 O V53 detects enable/disable status 7 2 DC 1 DVDD3V GND of communication with MAIN MI-COM 150 VCC DVDD2.2V 2-19 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION PIN 151 NAME I/O VSS FUNCTION REMARKS PG BK ADDR DATA BIT 0 GND 152 DIC4 VD I [Interrupt] DIC4 VD input 7 2 DC 153 DIC XSYSRST O DIC/FIC reset output 7 2 DD 7 154 CAM CS I [Interrupt] CAMERA MI-COM chip select input 7 2 DD 6 155 CAM PHOTO I Timing signal input for photo(Unused) 7 2 DD 5 156 CAM REQ O CAMERA MI-COM communication request output 7 2 DD 4 157 VCCP 158 VSSP 159 RESERVE3 O Unused 7 2 DF 5 160 HP DET I Headphones jack detection input 7 2 DF 4 161 EXT DET I External microphone detection input 7 2 DF 3 162 S DET I S-terminal connection detection 7 2 DF 2 163 PLUG IN I AV multi-terminal insertion detection 7 2 DF 1 164 MCLKEN I Clock enable of camera system 7 2 DF 0 165 LOAD O Loading motor control (LOAD) 7 2 E0 7 166 UNLOAD O Loading motor control (UNLOAD) 7 2 E0 6 167 ID REQ I N.C. (for development investigation) 7 2 E1 3 168 LMO CONT O Loading motor control (CONT) 7 2 E0 5 169 CAP ON O Capstan motor start/stop signal output 7 2 E0 4 170 XIDACK O N.C. (for development investigation) 7 2 E1 2 171 CAP FWD O Capstan motor rotation direction signal output 7 2 E0 3 172 TAPE LED O Tape LED illuminant control 173 N.C O DVDD3V GND 7 2 E0 2 7 2 E1 1 174 DRUM ON O Drum motor start/stop signal output 7 2 E0 1 175 SELCSLP O Drum driver control 7 2 E1 0 176 REEL LED CONT O Reel sensor LED illumination power save 7 2 E0 0 177 XCIN I 32 KHz 178 VSSR 179 XCOUT 180 VCCR C0 GND O 32 KHz Power flag is set when VCCR decreases to 0.1 V or less once then increases back to 1.8 V. 181 AVREF DVDD3V 182 AVCC DVDD3V 183 DEWDETECT I Dew condensation detection 7 2 184 KEY AD0 I Operation key detection (STOP, REW, REC, PAUSE) 7 2 C1 185 KEY AD1 I Operation key detection (PLAY, FF, DE, ON/OFF) 7 2 C2 186 KEY AD2 I Operation key detection (MENU, EXP, FOCUS) 7 2 C3 C4 187 KEY AD3 I Operation key detection (EXECUTE) 7 2 188 KEY AD4 I Operation key detection (Unused) 7 2 C5 189 S REEL FG I S-reel FG signal input 7 2 C6 190 T REEL FG I T-reel FG signal input 7 2 C7 191 TAPE TOP AD I Tape top sensor signal input 7 2 C8 192 TAPE END AD I Tape end sensor signal input 7 2 C9 193 MSW AD I Mechanism mode detection 7 2 CA 194 RAGC I VRP AGC signal detection 7 2 CB 195 WIDE DET I S1 signal voltage detection (wide signal detection) 7 2 CC 196 MMC DET I MMC detection; “L” when card present 7 2 CD 197 CARD PRO I Unused 7 2 CE 198 CAM DIC RST I CAM DIC RST (to CAMERA) 7 2 CF 199 AVSS GND 2-20 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 4-5-3 SUB MI-COM (IC203) PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION REMARKS PG BK ADDR 1 SUB CS O SUB MI-COM communication enable signal 7 3 FC DATA BIT 4 2 RMC PULSE IN I [Interrupt] input signal from remote controller 7 3 FC 3 3 SUB REQ I [Interrupt] MAIN MI-COM communication request input 7 3 FC 2 4 E3V DETECT I [Interrupt] E3V low voltage detection input 7 3 FC 1 5 N.C O 7 3 FC 0 6 LANC PW CONT O LANC power supply control output 7 3 FA 3 7 SCLK2 O SUB MI-COM serial clock output 7 3 FA 2 8 SIN2 O SUB MI-COM serial data output 7 3 FA 1 9 SOUT2 I SUB MI-COM serial data input 7 3 FA 0 10 MIC SCL O Cassette memory communication clock output terminal 7 3 FA 3 I/O Cassette memory communication data terminal 7 3 FA 2 11 MIC SDA 12 CNVSS 13 XCIN I Sub clock input 7 3 FA 1 14 XCOUT O Sub clock output 7 3 FA 0 15 RESET I Reset signal input 16 XIN I Main clock input 17 XOUT O 18 VSS GND Main clock output GND 19 DC J DET I DC jack insertion detection (Detection by voltage) 7 3 F9 7 20 CAS IN I CASSETTE IN switch detection 7 3 F9 6 21 EJECT SW I EJECT switch detection 7 3 F9 5 22 LANC ON I LANC power ON detection 7 3 F9 4 23 LI3 DET I Detected power loss of lithium battery for backup 7 3 F9 3 24 MAIN SW2 I Power swich detection 7 3 F9 2 25 MAIN SW1 I Power switch detection 7 3 F9 1 26 MAIN SW0 I Power switch detection 7 3 F9 0 27 VTR PW LED O VTR mode, POWER LED control 7 3 F8 7 28 CAM PW LED O Camera mode, POWER LED control 7 3 F8 6 29 TALLY LED O Tally LED control 7 3 F8 5 30 MIC ON O Cassette memory, power supply control 7 3 F8 4 31 EVF BL ON O 7 3 F8 3 32 N.C O 7 3 F8 2 33 N.C O Charger IC, serial data 7 3 F8 1 34 REC CTL O Recording current forcible OFF control 7 3 F8 0 35 F CH I Function check (for factory adjustment) 7 3 F7 36 SERVICE M S I Main serial is not detected. (for factory adjustment) 7 3 F6 37 MIC3 I Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 3 F5 38 MIC2 I Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 3 F4 39 MIC1 I Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 3 F3 40 - I Connect to GND 7 3 F2 41 BATT INFO AD I Battery type detection 7 3 F1 42 BATT AD I Battery low voltage detection 7 3 F0 43 VCC E3V + LI3V 44 VREF E3V 45 AVSS 46 LCD ON O LCD ON/OFF Control 7 3 FC 7 47 LCD BL ON O LCD backlight control 7 3 FC 6 48 VTR ON O VTR power supply control 7 3 FC 5 GND 2-21 CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS CONTENTS 1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1 1-1 List of Maintenance Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1 1-2 List of Supplies ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-1 2. Settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 2-1 Recorder Adjustment Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 2-1-1 Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3 4. Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 4-1 General --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 4-2 Service Mode Indications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-4 5. Description of Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5 5-1 Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-5 5-2 Mechanical Error Indications -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6 5-3 Camera Special Commands ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8 5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8 5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8 6. Service Hints ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9 6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9 6-2 Current Consumption Check -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9 7. Trouble Shooting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10 7-1 Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10 7-2 Camera Picture Faulty --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11 7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies 1-1 List of Maintenance Tools Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/NT SC) DY9-1321-000 Recorder electrical adjustment Alignment T ape (tracking) DY9-1345-000 Running adjustment DMC II Cassette T orque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC II Cleaning T ape (normal) – Commercially available DMC II DV Cleaning T ape (hard) DY9-1359-000 Head cleaning DMC II Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment DMC II Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment Color Viewer 5600 K for 100V DY9-2039-100 Camera electrical adjustment (JPN) Color Viewer 5600 K for 115V DY9-2039-115 Camera electrical adjustment (USA) Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement Filter, CCA W12ø46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment Remote Commander RM-95 DY9-1349-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment CZ/Siemens Chart DY9-1372-000 CZ adjustment *Same chart as the covention model's. 1-2 List of Supplies Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks Logenest Lambda A-74 CY9-8102-000 Lubrication Lens Grease GE-C9 CY9-8043-000 Lubrication Lens Grease GE-X8 CY9-8044-000 Lubrication Lens Hanarl KS -50 DY9-3047-000 Lubrication Cover Sponge (W × H × T : 300mm × 200mm × 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating /sound absorbing material Adhesive T ape, No.354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape (W × L × T : 9mm × 50m × 0.15mm, UL type) Adhesive T ape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose (W × L × T : 10mm × 50m × 0.16mm, UL type) double-side-coated adhesive tape Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm × 250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material Hanarl FL-778 DY9-3026-010 Lubrication Cover Floil C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication Cover Dia Bond No. 1663 DY9-3009-000 Adhesive T ape Kapton DY9-3052-000 General-purpose adhesive tape 3-1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 2. Settings Perform the AF/EIS/ CAMERA adjustments in a complete-product state. 2-1 Recorder Adjustment Setting <Purpose> Check of each section, tape path adjustment, and recorder electrical adjustment are made with the front, rear, left and right cover units removed. 2-1-1 Setting <Procedures> 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Solder the jumper wires (×2), TP2001 (PB-RF) and TP2002 (SWP) on the MAIN P.C.B. Connect the cable of the Right Cover unit with the CN102 (R-KEY) and CN3201 (power supply). To turn on the power, connect the cable of the Left Cover unit with the CN200 (P-DIAL). *Connecting the TP203 and TP204 (MAIN P.C.B.) to ground can trun on the power also. Operation by a LANC Remote Controller is possible by connecting the Docking Unit (DU-300) with the Multi Connector. The power is suppliable via the DC-400 or connecting the Constant Voltage Supplier with the TP3201/3202 (DC+) and the TP3203/ 3204 (DC-). R L V IC2000 IC3201 IC1302 MAIN P.C.B. FU3202 FU3201 CN1401 TP202 (CAM PW SW) TP204 (VTR PW SW2) TP203 (VTR PW SW1) MONITOR TV TP3201 (DC −) TP3202 (DC −) TP2002 (SWP) TP2001 TP3203 TP3204 (PB-RF) (DC +) (DC +) Left Cover Unit A/V JACK CN102 CN200 Right Cover Unit Docking Unit (DU-300) CN3201 Battery Treminal A/V JACK Right Cover Unit LANC REMOTE COMMANDER RM-95 Fig. 3-1 3-2 DC-400 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000) (1) Connect the LANC terminal. (2) To set up the service mode, turn the HOLD SW to the HOLD 1. HOLD SW position. When the HOLD SW is returned to its home position, the product is controlled using its own functions. 2. PAGE + 6 *:**:** (3) LCD indications in the service mode: 4) PAGE is indicated while the FOCUS KEY is held down. 4 5 5) BANK is indicated. 6) MODE is indicated. 10. MODE SELECT WR when the BATT mark is presented. 7) ADDR is indicated. 4. BANK - 7 11. PAGE DISPLAY 3. BANK + 12. EJECT 8) DT is indicated (hexadecimal). (4) The following table shows the key functions available in 8 9. STORE 5. ADDRESS + 6. ADDRESS - the service mode. 7. DATA + 8. DATA - Fig. 3-2 < Key Functions in Service Mode > No. 1 Key name (in service mode) HOLD Function T ransition to service mode by setting to the HOLD Key name (in normal state) HOLD position 2 PAGE + PAGE is incremented by one. ST ART /ST OP 3 BANK + BANK is incremented by one. EDIT SEARCH + 4 BANK - BANK is decremented by one. EDIT SEARCH - 5 ADDRESS + ADDRESS is incremented by one. FF 6 ADDRESS - ADDRESS is decremented by one. REW 7 DAT A + DAT A is incremented by one. PLAY 8 DAT A - DAT A is decremented by one. ST OP 9 ST ORE Confirmation/writing of DAT A PAUSE 10 MODE SELECT RD/WR mode selection REC REVIEW 11 PAGE DISPLAY PAGE is indicated on LED of remote controller. FOCUS 12 EJECT EJECT operation is performed. COUNT ER RESET 3-3 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 4. Service Modes 4-1 General (1) The service modes are of a command input type using LANC communication. (2) In the command-input-type service mode, operation mode transition in the main unit can be performed using the keys equipped on it. Also, by returning the HOLD SW to the normal mode position, the operation mode transition on the main unit can be pefrormed with the service remote controller. (3) In the command-input-type service mode, the mechanism error, dew, insufficiency of power and other safety detecting functions are ineffective. (4) In the command-input-type service mode, the LCD mirror function is ineffective. 4-2 Service Mode Indications Shown below are the on-screen indications to be given in the service modes. 1) Indicates that the service mode is set up (“SERV”). 2) 3) Indicates which block is subjected to the command (“MAIN”, “CAM”, “SUB” microcomputer etc.). Indicates a message for a special command (“DATA”, “SUB” etc.). 4) 5) PG BK : Indicates the PAGE being selected (“4” to “7”). :Indicates the BANK being selected (“0” to “7”). 6) 7) MD ADDR :Indicates the MODE being selected (RD/WR). : Indicates the ADDRESS being selected in hexadecimal (**00 to **FF, 0000 to FFFF). 8) 9) DT DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in hexadecimal (00 to FF). : Indicates the DATA being read or set in binary (********), except for some special functions. 10) ST : Indicates the STATUS in progress (“OK”,“NG”, “BUSY” etc.). 11) Indicates an absolute track number. 12) E0 13) E1 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH0 (low channel) head. : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH1 (high channel) head. 14) Indicates a version number of the MAIN microcomputer. 15) Indicates a version number of the SUB microcomputer. 16) Indicates a version number of the CAMERA microcomputer. 17) Indicates a firmware version for Card control. (MC model only) S ERV ( 2 )( ) S TO P 0 : 0 0 : 00 : 00 11 ) ( 3 1 PG B K MD ADDR D T S T (4 )( 5)( 6 )( E 0 ( 12 ) E1 ( 13 ) 7 ( )( 8 )( 9 CD ( MA ( MD ( CA ( Fig. 3-3 3-4 ) ) 10 17 14 15 16 ) ) ) ) ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 5. Description of Service Modes 5-1 Error Rate <Generals> (1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked. (2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc. <How to read a VIDEO error rate> An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi- Low ch. cated in exponential representation. High ch. EO 1 5 E1 Example) ‘15’ is indicated: Error rate = 1 ×10 -5 1 × 10 -5 Fig. 3-4 <How to read an AUDIO error rate> Low ch. To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the table below. High ch. AO 2 3 A1 The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits. 2 3 (FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.) (hexadecimal) Example) ‘23’is indicated: Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35 ( 2 × 1 6 ) + 3 = 3 5 (decimal) In the product specifications, the error rate on both channels in self -recording LP playback is as follows : Fig. 3-5 Error rate =28H or less (Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less) Important After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.) ST EP PROCEDURE ERROR RAT E 1 1) Make setting shown at right. PG 6 MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 4 WR --1D 00 Microcomputer operation ST Product setting 03 Audio error rate indication ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ Reference) Product setting can be selected by resetting DT to 00. T hus, the Audio+Video error rate is indicated. 2) Set DT to 03. 3-5 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 5-2 Mechanical Error Indications <Generals> (1) When the camcorder is stopped upon detection of a mechanical error, the POWER LED indicator blinks and the message “EJECT CASSETTE”appears on screen. At this step, the error condition can be checked in the service mode. (2) A mechanical error indication is given in either one of the following two manners: indication of data held only by the main battery, and indication of data backed up by the Lithium 3V. Referring to the table shown below, select an indication mode. (3) Data backed up by the Lithium 3V can be reset at step 3. ST EP PROCEDURE MECH. ERROR PG MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT Microcomputer operation ST 1 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --01 -- Error data held only in the POWER-ON 2 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --02 -- Error data backed up by the EEPROM is 3 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 WR --02 00 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ state is indicated. indicated. * Completion of backup data resetting <Indication of error data held only by the main battery> E: T A P E E N D B: T A P E T O P D: D R U M E R R O R C: C A P S T A N E R R O R S:S-REEL ERROR T:T-REEL ERROR L:LOADING MTR ERROR D: D E W E R R O R PG B K MD ADDR D T S T 7 2 RD - - 01 - - E BDC S T L D Relevant error indication is highlighted. Fig. 3-6 <Indication of error data backed up by Lithium 3V> PG B K MD ADDR D T S T 7 2 RD - -02 D: D R U M E R R O R C: C A P S T A N E R R O R S:S-REEL ERROR T:T-REEL ERROR L:LOADING MTR ERROR D: D E W E R R O R - - * * DC S T L D Rele v a n t e rro r i n d i c a ti o n i s h i ghl i ghted. Fig. 3-7 3-6 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 5-3 Camera Special Commands <Generals> (1) The camera special commands are available for operation check. (2) Referring to the table shown below, make preparation, and then use any camera special commands as required. (3) All the settings are reset when the STORE key is pressed in the “WR”mode at a relevant item. Also, all commands are reset by turning the power off and on again. ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT Microcomputer operation CAM SPECIAL COMMAND PG 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 33 WAIT 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR 3300 ↑ -- WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 3301 -- OK -- WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR 3302 -- OK -- WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 3303 -- OK -- WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 3304 -- OK -- WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 3305 ↑ 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR 3306 ↑ 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR 3307 -- OK -- WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 3308 -- OK -- WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR 3309 -- OK ↑ 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR 330A ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 330B -- ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 330C -- OK White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. -- WAIT (DIC) ↑ ↑ RD -- OK Preparation WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. WB LOCK 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. WB T URBO 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. WB 1) Make setting shown at right. OUT DOOR 2) Press the ST ORE key. WB INDOOR 1) Make setting shown at right. IRIS OPEN 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2) Press the ST ORE key. IRIS CLOSE 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. AGC MAX 1) Make setting shown at right. AGC MIN 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2) Press the ST ORE key. COLOR BAR 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. (DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. (DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2) Press the ST ORE key. RD RD RD RD RD RD ↑ ST OK -- OK -- WAIT -- OK -- WAIT ----- Completion of high address "33" setting WB is set. WB is locked. WB high-speed setting mode Outdoor white balance mode Indoor white balance mode T he iris is opened forcibly. T he iris is closed forcibly. A value of AGC gain is maximized. A value of AGC gain is minimized. WAIT Output a color bar signal for DIC output. OK WAIT Output a white 100% signal for FIC output. OK WAIT Output a white 50% signal for DIC output. DIC output, white (By charging the DT of "PG : 5, BK : 0, AD : 2822", the brightness can be changed arbitrary. White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330D -- ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 330E -- ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ↑ WR 330F -- OK White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. -- WAIT (FIC) ↑ ↑ RD -- OK (FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. (FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ -- WAIT Output a white 100% signal for FIC output. OK WAIT Output a white 50% signal for FIC output. FIC output, white (By charging the DT of "PG : 5, BK : 0, AD : 2822", the brightness can be changed arbitrary. 3-7 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting <Generals> (1) Setting the address according to the table below allows to check whether the lens resetting is ended or not. (2) The 1st digit of binary number indication (Fig. 3-3 9 ) of data is for zoom, and the 2nd for focus resetting. Resetting is ended if 1 is indicated. ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation LENS RESET PG BK PREPARAT ION 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 31 WAIT ↑ 5 ↑ 0 RD ↑ 313F ↑ -- WAIT 2) Press the ST ORE key. LENS RESET Set to status shown on right and MD ADDR DT RD ST OK Completion of high address"31" setting check the binary number indication data. 5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches <Generals> (1) In the service mode, the terminals of the MAIN and SUB microcomputer can be checked. Thereby, it is allowed to check keyrelated operations and key-microcomputer connections in the product state. (2) The addresses of the microcomputer terminals for checking are indicated in the “Remarks” column in the I/O port table (p. 2-14 to p. 2-21). Note that since serial communication data signals are not synchronous with the LANC communication cycle (field) in the service mode, operations related to these signals are not indicated accurately. So, use indications for these signals just as reference data. (3) The following explanations are provided for the data content which seem rather complicated. For other than below, use the addresses shown in the “Remarks” column of the I/O port table. (4) When carrying out functional checks, select the RD mode. 5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key (1) On the MAIN and SUB microcomputers, the terminals shown in Fig. 3-8 are A/D input ports. Key and/or mode is detected by means of the A/D-converted voltage. MI-COM Pin No. NAME PG BK ADDR MAIN 193 MSW AD 7 2 CA MAIN 183 DEW DET 7 2 C0 MAIN 184 KEY A/D 0 7 2 C1 A/D DATA(00~FF) (00~36) LOAD1 (37~64) STBY (00~12) DEW RELEASE (65~87) POP UP (88~A2) PLAY (16~FF) DEW DET (00~2C) STOP (2D~67) REW (68~A7) REC PAUSE (A8~FF) -- MAIN 185 KEY A/D 1 7 2 C2 PLAY FF DE.ON/OFF -- MAIN 186 KEY A/D 2 7 2 C3 MENU EXP FOCOS -- MAIN 187 KEY A/D 3 7 2 C4 EXECUTE -- -- SUB 41 BATT. INFO A/D 7 3 F1 SUB 42 7 3 F0 BATT A/D (00~33) Without battery (34~65) -- Voltage of main power supply Fig. 3-8 3-8 (A3~BA) STOP (66~99) BP-422 (9A~FF) BP-406 (BB~E3) LOAD2 (E4~FF) GAP ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 6. Service Hints 6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below. LITHIUM P.C.B. CA P.C.B. ZOOM SW UNIT CVF P.C.B. CCD P.C.B. AUDIO P.C.B. R-KEY UNIT MMC P.C.B. SUB P.C.B. MULTI P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. LCD P.C.B. Fig.3-9 6-2 Current Consumption Check The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status. Measurement condition Preset voltage : Product status, camera auto mode(AF,IS OFF), LCD ON (0.1A each smaller in case of CVF) : 7.4V * : MC model only POWER SW MODE Current Consumption (A) POWER SW MODE Current Consumption (A) CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.65 VT R ST ILL 0.50 REC 0.72 FF/REW 0.70 ST OP 0.63 CUE/REV 0.61 ST OP 0.46 CARD REC * 0.70 PLAY 0.57 CARD PLAY * 0.47 VT R 3-9 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 7. Trouble Shooting To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points. 7-1 Power Supply <Hints> When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences. Power source inserted→ POWER UNREG is supplied to MAIN P.C.B. → SUB microcomputer is activated.→ SUB microcomputer activates recorder power supply.→SUB microcomputer communicates with MAIN microcomputer.→MAIN microcomputer initializes the mechanisms.→After initialization, SUB microcomputer turns OFF recorder power supply.→ Standby mode is set. Then, the power is turned on in the following sequences. Power mode switch operated → After received at SUB microcomputer, VTR or CAM ON “H” signal is output. → PWM driver is activated to turn on each power supply. → Each microcomputer (SUB, MAIN, CAMERA) is started up to carry out system control. <Check Points> 1) Key Inputs 2) Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode. Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indicated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty. 3) Error in Mechanism (P. 3-6) If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected. At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in the SERVICE mode. 4) VTR ON “H” (control signal from SUB microcomputer) Outputs Check the output of control signal by the LANC remote controller. 5) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B. Check the continuations of fuses FU 3201,3202 on MAIN P.C.B. If any fuse is faulty, replace it and check the current consump- 6) tion. Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation. 3-10 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS 7-2 Camera Picture Faulty <Hints> A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below. CCD → CA P.C.B. → MAIN P.C.B. (DIC4 → SIC → VIC2→VIF2) → JACK P.C.B. <Check Points> 1) Lens Resetting (P. 3-8) 2) If the camera picture is not displayed, check it in the service mode. If NG, check the lens. Blue Back Output In the VCR mode, the blue-back signal is generated by the VIC2 mounted on the MAIN P.C.B. Therefore, if its normal output can be confirmed, it can be judged that the signal line subsequent to the VIC2 are normal. 3) Check of white 100% or color bar (DIC 4) output (P. 3-7) The white 100% or color bar (DIC 4) signal is generated by the DIC4 mounted on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, check whether the white 100% or corol bar signal is generated normally or not. If its output is normal, the signal line subsequent to the DIC4 would be normal. 4) CCD Output The CCD output signal is sampled by the CDS/AGC/AD IC. Check this signal condition. 5) Camera Special Command (P. 3-7) Check the operations of White Balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the SERVICE mode. 7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture <Hints> In DV format, the deterioration of picture quality appears on the screen as a block noise. This failure is occurred when the picture information (in block unit) exceeds a limit of processing performance of error correction and the previous picture information is used for compensation. Normally, if an error rate is worsened considerably by the deterioration of tape quality or head output, the symptom appears. For this reason, when you check the playback picture, check the error rate. To evaluate the error rate at an absolute value, use several kinds of tapes. <Check Points> 1) Deterioration of Tape Quality Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit. 2) Error Rate (P. 3-5) Check an error rate of self-recording LP playbacked picture in the SERVICE mode. 3) If the result is “NG” check the following points. Head Output (See the DMC II Service Manual.) Referring to a service manual of DMC II, check the RF output level and linearity. (including a cleaning of head) The relation between the RF envelope and the faulty symptom is as below. · Lack of output at inlet side : abnormal sound, left part of screen has a block noise. · Lack of output at outlet side : abnormal time code, etc., right part of screen has a block noise. 4) EQ Automatic Adjustment (P. 4-36) Referring to the adjustment procedures, perform the EQ automatic adjustment. By this adjustment, the Playback Amplifier circuit in theVRP2 (on the MAIN P.C.B.) and the playback RF output are matched so that the error rate is minimized automatically. 3-11 CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT CONTENTS 1. Disassembling and Reassembling ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1 1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1 1-2 Separation of Finder Unit &Rear Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2 1-3 Separation of Top Cover, Mic Cover and Zoom Key Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3 1-4 Separation of LCD Holder Cover, Front Cover Unit and Remote Control Window Cover -------------------------------- 4-4 1-5 Separation of Left Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5 1-6 Separation of Right Cover Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6 1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, Lens Ring Unit and CA P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-7 1-8 Separation of Jack Unit, Multi P.C.B., Main P.C.B., Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit -------------------------------------------- 4-8 1-9 Separation of Lens Unit, SUB P.C.B. and Recorder Holder -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9 1-10 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-10 1-11 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-11 1-12 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-12 1-13 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-13 1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-14 1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-15 1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-16 1-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-17 1-18 Disassembly of LCD Unit 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-18 1-19 Disassembly of LCD Unit 4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-19 1-20 Disassembly of CVF Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-20 1-21 Disassembly of Lens Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-21 1-22 Disassembly of Lens Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-22 1-23 List of Screws Used ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-23 1-24 List of Disassembly Photos ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-24 2. Adjustment Procedures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-26 2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-26 2-2 AF Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-27 2-2-1 CZ Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-27 2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-27 2-3 IS Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28 2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28 2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-28 2-3-3 EEPROM Writing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28 2-4 Camera Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29 2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29 2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29 2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30 2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30 2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30 2-4-6 EEPROM Writing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30 2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-31 2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-31 2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-32 2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34 2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34 2-6-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34 2-6-3 C LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-35 2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-35 2-6-5 SWP Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-36 2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-36 2-6-7 EQ Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-36 2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-37 2-7 Tape Path Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-37 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1. Disassembling and Reassembling Notes : (1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part. (2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure diagram and interconnection diagram for boards. ⋅ Lateral engaging connector (The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) : Contacts are positioned downward. (board side) ∗ : Contacts are positioned upward. ⋅ Lengthwise engaging connector (The instructions are given only in the boards interconnection diagram.) Indicated by →. Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts. (3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8012-000) 1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart (1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart. (2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures. : MAIN FLOW START : SUB FLOW : MAIN UNIT 1-2 Finder Unit 1-2 Rear Cover 1-7 CVF Unit 1-3 Top Cover 1-7 Lens Ring Unit 1-3 Mic Cover 1-7 CA P.C.B 1-21 CCD P.C.B. 1-3 Zoom Key Unit 1-8 Jack Unit 1-21 CCD Unit 1-4 LCD Holder Cover 1-8 Multi P.C.B. 1-4 Front Cover Unit 1-8 Main P.C.B. 1-4 Remocon Window Cover 1-8 Audio P.C.B. 1-5 Left Cover Unit 1-6 Right Cover Unit 1-12 MMC P.C.B. 1-8 Mic Unit 1-12 Main Dial Unit 1-9 Lens Unit 1-14 LCD Unit 1-9 SUB P.C.B. 1-14 Battery Terminal Unit 1-9 Recorder Holder 1-15 Recorder Key Unit 4-1 1-20 CVF P.C.B. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-2 Separation of Finder Unit &Rear Cover (1) Push the Lever and detach the Finder Unit. (2) Open the LCD Unit and Cassette Cover. (3) Remove five screws (a × 2, b × 1, c × 1, d × 1) and detach the Rear Cover. (4) Separate the AV cover from the Rear Cover. < Instruction for Supply > Finder section : Hanal FL778 (DY9-3026-000) Shaft and spring parts: Hanal FL778 (DY9-3026-000) Grease applying Position Hanal FL-778 Cassette Cover Rear Cover (2) (3) - b (3) - c (1) Finder Unit LCD Unit (2) (4) Lever (3) (3) - a (3) - d AV Cover (3) - a Grease applying Position (1) a b 3mm Silver Painted M1.7 c 3mm Silver Painted M1.7 d 3.5mm 5.5mm Silver Painted M1.7 (self tap) Metal M1.7 Hanal FL-778 (Shaft and Spring) Fig. 4-1 4-2 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-3 Separation of Top Cover, Mic Cover and Zoom Key Unit (1) Remove two screws (b × 1, e × 1). (2) Detach the Top Cover, Mic Cover and Mic Sheet. (3) Remove CN1401 and two screws (f × 2), then detach the Zoom Key Unit. (3) - f Zoom Key Unit (1) - b Top Cover Mic Cover (3) Mic Sheet (2) (1) - e (2) CN1401 b e 3mm Silver Painted M1.7 f 2mm 2.5mm Silver Painted M1.7 Metal M1.4 Fig. 4-2 4-3 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-4 Separation of LCD Holder Cover, Front Cover Unit and Remote Control Window Cover (1) Remove two screws (g × 2), and detach the upper and lower LCD Holder Covers and Front Cover Unit. Since the magnets are attached to the LCD Holder Covers, be careful about the polarity when reassembling. (2) Remove the Remote Control Window Cover. < Note on Reassembling > (1) When attaching the magnets on the LCD Holder Covers with an adhesive, face the red-painted sides (N) down. < Instruction for Supply > Adhesion of magnet : DIA BOND No. 1663 (DY9-3009-000) Bond applying Position DIA BOND No,1663 LCD Holder Cover Remote Control Window Cover (1) - g (1) (2) LCD Holder Cover (1) Note on Reassembling (1) Front Cover Unit g Magnets (Face down the red-painted sides) 4mm Silver Painted M1.7 (self tap) LCD Holder Covers Fig. 4-3 4-4 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-5 Separation of Left Cover Unit (1) Detach the Hand Strap. (2) Remove four screws (d × 1, j × 1, k × 2). (3) Detach CN200, and with the Cassette Cover opened, remove the Left Cover Unit. (2) - j (3) Cassette Cover CN200 Left Cover Unit (3) (3) (2) - k (2) - k (1) (2) - d Hand Strap d j 3.5mm Metal M1.7 Fig. 4-4 4-5 k 3.5mm Black M1.7 (self tap) 4mm Metal M1.7 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-6 Separation of Right Cover Unit (1) Rotate the LCD Unit and detach seven screws (i × 4, l × 3). (2) Detach connectors CN102, CN1502 and CN3201, then remove the Right Cover Unit. < Note on Reassembling > (1) Secure three screws (i) in order. (2) Be careful when wiring the FPC of CN102. Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2) No.3 Screw tightening order CN102 No.2 Rest of FPC should be inserted between the metal plate and the P.C.B., and not under the rubber part. No.1 (1) - i UL Tape (1) - i (2) CN102 (1) - i (1) - l (2) CN1502 (1) (1) - l CN3201 (1) - l LCD Unit (2) Right Cover Unit (1) - i i l 2.5mm Metal M1.7 3mm Metal M1.7 Fig. 4-5 4-6 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, Lens Ring Unit and CA P.C.B. (1) Peel off the cushions, let the Mic Unit float above the CVF Unit, then remove two screws (h × 1, m × 1) and CN1501, and detach the CVF Unit. (2) Detach two screws (n × 2) and remove the Lens Ring Unit. (3) Remove CN1402, and while detaching CN1000 and CN1001 (B to B), remove the CA P.C.B. < Note on Reassembling > (1) Be sure to attach the Cushions on the specified positions. Lens Ring Unit (2) - n CN1402 Mic Unit (3) (1) (2) (1) (2) - n CN1501 (1) Cushion CA P.C.B. (3) (1) (1) Cushion CN1001 (B to B) (1) - m (1) - h CN1000 (B to B) CVF Unit h Note on Reassembling (1) Align with the ridge line. Align the corners. (adjust so that upper end of cushion falls into the space, and is not placed on the CVF plate). 2.5mm Metal M1.7 Left reference m 4.5mm Metal M1.4 Cushion Cushion Fold the surplus part toward the inside. Align the lower end with the lower edge of metallic plate of the lens. Fig. 4-6 4-7 n 1.3mm Black M1.4 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-8 Separation of Jack Unit, Multi P.C.B., Main P.C.B., Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit (1) Detach two screws (h × 2) and CN3302 and CN93, then detach the Jack Unit. (2) Detach two screws (h × 1, i × 1) and CN92, then remove the Multi P.C.B. (3) Remove three screws (h × 3) and CN304, CN1301 (B to B), CN2000 and UL tape, and detach the Main P.C.B, Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit together. (4) Remove CN601 and CN3301 (B to B), and separate the Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit from the Main P.C.B. Main P.C.B. UL Tape Mic Unit Audio P.C.B. Audio P.C.B. CN1301 (B to B) (3) (3) UL Tape (4) CN3301 (B to B) (3) - h CN304 CN601 (B to B) (3) (1) CN3302 (2) - i (1) (3) (3) - h (1) (2) CN92 CN2000 (1) - h (2) h i 2.5mm 2.5mm Metal M1.7 Main P.C.B. Metal M1.7 Multi P.C.B. (3) - h (2) - h CN93 Fig. 4-7 4-8 Jack Unit (1) - h ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-9 Separation of Lens Unit, SUB P.C.B. and Recorder Holder (1) Detach two screws (m × 2) then remove the Lens Unit and Lens Sheet. (2) Detach two screws (h × 2) and CN300, CN301, CN302, CN303, and remove the SUB P.C.B. (3) Detach three screws (p × 2, q × 1) and the Spring, then remove the Recorder Holder. Note : Be sure to face downward the cassette compartment side of the DMCII mechanism unit, from which the recorder holder has been detached. (Facing the gear at the rear of main chassis downward may result in damage to it.) < Note on Reassembling > (1) When attaching the Recorder Holder, note that there should be Rubber pieces at five locations. (2) Before using the Insulation Rubber of service parts, coat the entire surface with Hanal KS-50M (DY9-3047-000). Lens Unit (3) Recorder Holder (1) Rubber (1) - m UL Tape UL Tape UL Tape (3) - p Lens Sheet Rubber (1) - m Rubber (2) - h Rubber (2) (2) - h h m 2.5mm Metal M1.7 p Metal M1.4 Metal M1.4 Spring (3) - q 3mm 3.5mm 4.5mm SUB P.C.B. q Metal M1.4 (2) Note on Reassembling (1) CN302 SUB P.C.B. CN303 CN301 CN300 Set the side of cassette compartment downward. Fig. 4-8 4-9 (2) (3) - p ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-10 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1 (1) Open the MMC Cover, detach four screws (i × 1, r × 1, s × 2) and remove the C Cover. (2) Remove one screw (t × 1) then detach Spring Plate, Dial Plate and Switch Knob. (3) Remove two screws (d × 1, u × 1) and detach MMC Cover Unit. (ELURA20 MC A) or SD Cover Holder (ELURA10 A) < Note on Reassembling > (1) Secure the screws of C Cover in order. < Instruction for Supply > Spring Plate : Hanal KS-50 Grease applying Position Hanal KS-50 Dial Plate Spring Plate (1) - r (1) - i (2) - t (3) (2) (3) - u (2) Double-side adhesive tape (3) (3) - u C Cover MMC Cover Unit (1) Switch Knob (3) - d (ELURA20 MC A) SD Cover Holder (1) - s (3) - d (ELURA10 A) d i Note on Reassembling (1) 1.8mm Metal M1.7 Metal M1.7 Metal M1.7 s t u 3mm Metal M1.7 Screw tightening No.3 Order r 2.5mm 3.5mm 2mm 2.8mm Metal M1.4 (self tap) No.2 Metal M1.7 No.1 Fig. 4-9 4-10 No.1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-11 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 2 (1) Remove the Hand Strap. (2) Detach six screws (u × 2, v × 1, w × 1, h × 2) and CN14, then remove the Cassette Rear Cover. (2) - w Cassette Rear Cover (2) h 2.5mm Metal M1.7 (2) - u u 2mm (2) CN14 Metal M1.7 v (2) - v 6mm Metal M1.7 w (2) - h 3.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) Hand Strap Fig. 4-10 4-11 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-12 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 3 (1) Detach CN11, CN13, CN15 and then MMC P.C.B. (2) Detach one screw (h × 1) and then the Main Dial Unit. < Note on Reassembling > (1) The speaker wiring at the rear of Main Dial Unit should be run through the A part (in Fig. 4-11) for connection. Note on Reassembling (1) A (2) (2) - h (1) (1) CN15 CN11 MMC P.C.B. (1) Main Dial Unit (1) CN13 h 2.5mm Metal M1.7 Fig. 4-11 4-12 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-13 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 4 (1) Peel off the Caution Seal, remove five screws (i × 1, l × 2, r × 1, C × 1), and separate the Left Cover and Cassette Arm Unit. < Note on Reassembling > (1) Fold the FPC as shown in the figure when connecting it. < Instruction for Supply > Arm guide assembly in Cassette Arm Unit : FLOIL C-1Z Left Cover Cassette Arm Unit (1) (1) - l (1) - r (1) - C (1) - i (1) Cassette Arm Guide Note on Reassembling (1) Caution Seal Grease applying Position (1) - l i l 2.5mm Metal M1.7 Floil C-1Z Fig. 4-12 4-13 1.8mm 3mm Metal M1.7 C r Metal M1.7 3mm Metal M1.7 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 1 (1) Remove two screws (x × 2) and detach the LCD Unit. (2) Remove two screws (l × 2) and detach the Battery Terminal Unit. (3) Remove one screw (y × 1) and detach the Tripod Plate. < Note on Reassembling > (1) Set the distance between the shadowed part of LCD-MAIN FPC and the step part of the Right Cover at 1mm as in the figure. Then secure them with the UL tape. Note on Reassembling (1) Rear side of right cover 1mm LCD-MAIN FPC UL Tape (2) (2) - l (1) LCD Unit Tripod Plate Battery Terminal Unit (3) Right Cover (3) - y (1) - x (1) - x l x 3mm Metal M1.7 Fig. 4-13 4-14 y 4.5mm Metal M2.0 4.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 2 (1) Separate the Recorder Key Unit from the Right Cover. Note : The Recorder Unit is held in place by double-side adhesive tape. So, push it through the hole in the rear of Right Cover by a thin stick so it is raised, and then pulled slowly to separate it. Also, be careful not to damage the FPC when pulling it through the hole in Right Cover. (1) Recorder Key Unit Right Cover CAUTION Hole Fig. 4-14 4-15 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1 (1) Remove five screws (e × 5) then detach the LCD Top Cover while being careful with the Claw A. < Note on Reassembling > (1) LCD Top Cover should be assembled after inserting the Claw A. (1) - e LCD Top Cover Note on Reassembling (1) (1) - e Claw A (1) (1) - e e 2.5mm Silver Painted M1.7 Fig. 4-15 4-16 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit 2 (2) Remove CN901, CN902, CN903, unsolder at two places (B), and remove two screws (h × 2) to detach the LCD P.C.B., LCD Shield the Back Light Unit and LCD Panel. < Note on Reassembling > (1) Cover the element on the LCD P.C.B. with UL tape. Note, however, that UL tape should be attached so taht it will not protrube from the LCD P.C.B. (2) Mount the LCD P.C.B., LCD Shield and the Backlight Unit as in the Fig.4-16. CN902 Note on Reassembling (1) UL Tape CN901 CN903 (1) (1) - h (1) - B LCD P.C.B. LCD Shield Be sure to cover this element without fail. (1) Back Light Unit (1) - B Attach UL tape so that it will not protrude beyond the side edge of the PCB. (1) - h h 2.5mm Metal M1.7 LCD Panel Note on Reassembling (2) 1 : Pass the Back Light Wire through the hole in LCD P.C.B. 2 : Bend the Back Light wire, solder it,and fold the LCD shield through 180 along the edge of the LCD P.C.B. Bending direction CN903 CN901 CN902 Bending direction CN903 CN901 CN902 IC902 IC902 T4201 T4201 Solder here. Before passing the wire through the hole, fit the protrusion at the perforations in the LCD P.C.B. unit into the hole of the Back Light Unit. Fig. 4-16 4-17 LCD Shield ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-18 Disassembly of LCD Unit 3 (1) Remove one screw (j × 1) to detach the LCD Lock Switch. (2) Separate one screw (h × 1), LCD Hinge Unit and LCD SW FPC. (3) Remove two screws (D × 2), peel off the Magnet sheet and detach the Hinge Covers L,R. < Note on Reassembling > (1) The magnet has polarities. LCD SW FPC (2) (3) - D (1) - j Magnet Sheet (2) - h (3) Magnet Hinge Cover L (1) (3) LCD Hinge Unit Hinge Cover R LCD Lock Switch (1) Note on Reassembling (1) Hinge Cover R Hinge Cover L h j 2.5mm Metal M1.7 The side with red paint (N) should face upward. Fig. 4-17 4-18 D 3.5mm Black M1.7 (self tap) 4mm Black M1.7 (self tap) ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-19 Disassembly of LCD Unit 4 (1) Remove the LCD FPC sheet and the LCD FPC from the Hinge unit. < Note on Reassembling > (1) Before using the LCD FPC of service part, cut the part of it as indicated in the figure. Then, align the positions “1” with “2”, “3” with “4” respectively, and then fix them with the Kapton tape (DY9-3052-000) so that it covers the LCD FPC. (2) After wiring the LCD FPC around the Hinge Unit, be sure to wrap it with the LCD FPC Sheet before assembling. < Instruction for Supply > LCD FPC, LCD FPC Sheet : Hanal FL778 Kapton Tape : Tape, Kapton DY9-3052-000 LCD FPC Kapton Tape LCD Hinge Unit Note on Reassembling (1) 15mm (1) 9mm (1) 1~2mm Align outside, and attach tape securely. LCD FPC Sheet 2 Kapton Tape 4 1 3 15mm Grease applying Position 9mm Kapton Tape LCD FPC 1~2mm Hanal FL778 Align outside, and attach tape securely. Fig. 4-18 4-19 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-20 Disassembly of CVF Unit (1) Detach two screws (z × 1, A × 1), CN4102 and the Rubber, then remove the CVF Plate, CVF P.C.B. and the Cushion. (2) Unsolder part B and remove the Back Light Unit. (3) Detach the LCD Stopper, CVF Panel and Mask. Note : Detach the LCD Stopper while being careful about the four claws. (4) Remove the Clamp Washer, Finder Lever and Spring. (2) Clamp Washer Back Light Unit Finder Lever (4) Rubber (1) CVF P.C.B. Spring (2)-B (Solder here) Cushion CVF P.C.B. Mask (2) (3) CN4102 CVF Plate CVF Panel (1) - A (1) Back Light Unit (1) (1) - z CAUTION LCD Stopper UL Tape Claws z A 3mm Black M1.7 (self tap) Claws Fig. 4-19 4-20 3.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-21 Disassembly of Lens Unit 1 (1) Detach the Lens Rubber Ring. (2) Remove two screws (o × 2), CCD Unit, CCD P.C.B., CCD Graphite, CCD Rubber and IR Filter. < Note on Reassembling > (1) Align the CCD Graphite with the edges of CCD P.C.B. and squeeze in so that it contacts the legs of CCD. (2) Be sure to attach the washer between the CCD P.C.B. and the CCD Unit. (2) - o CCD Graphite Poly Washer (2) CCD P.C.B. Metal Washer CCD Unit CCD Rubber Lens Unit IR Filter Lens Rubber Ring (1) Note on Reassembling (1) IR Filter CCD P.C.B. CCD Graphite CCD o Evaporated surface (side that appears reddish when exposed to light) LENS Align with edges of CA P.C.B. Bring in contact with legs of CCD. Fig. 4-20 4-21 6mm Black M1.7 (self tap) ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-22 Disassembly of Lens Unit 2 (3) Remove five screws (B × 5), IG meter, and AF/PZ Motor. (Unsolder parts to be replaced (α).) < Instruction for Supply > AF/PZ motor shaft: LOGENEST LAMBDA A-74 (CY9-8102-000) IG Meter (1) - B Lens Unit AF Motor (1) (1) (1)-α (1) - B (1) (1) (1)-α (1) PZ Motor (1) - B (1) - B Grease applying Position (1) - B Logenest Lambda A-74 B 4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) Fig. 4-21 4-22 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT PARTS NO. REMARKS SYMBOL SYMBOL 1-23 List of Screws Used ILLUST REMARKS REMARKS ILLUST a DA2-1455-000 (Coated with XA1-7170-307) M1.7-3.0mm 3mm p XA9-1167-000 Stepped Screw M1.4-3.5mm (METAL) 3.5mm b DA2-1017-000 (Coated with XA9-1002-000) M1.7-3.0mm 3mm q XA9-1260-000 Stepped Screw M1.4-3.0mm (METAL) 3mm (Coated with XA4-5170-557) DA2-1018-000 Self Tap M1.7-5.5mm 5.5mm c d XA1-7170-357 M1.7-3.5mm (METAL) e DA2-1015-000 (Coated with XA9-1001-000) M1.7-2.5mm r XA9-1000-000 M1.7-1.8mm (thin head) (METAL) 1.8mm 3.5mm s XA9-1002-000 M1.7-3.0mm (thin head) (METAL) 3mm t XA4-9140-287 Self Tap M1.4-2.8mm (METAL) 2.5mm 2.8mm XA1-7140-207 M1.4-2.0mm (METAL) 2mm u XA1-7170-207 M1.7-2.0mm (METAL) 2mm (Coated with XA4-9170-407) g DA2-1016-000 Self Tap M1.7-4.0mm 4mm v XA1-7170-607 M1.7-6.0mm (METAL) 6mm f h XA1-7170-257 M1.7-2.5mm (METAL) Self Tap 2.5mm w XA9-1004-000 M1.7-3.5mm (thin head) (METAL) 3.5mm i XA9-1001-000 M1.7-2.5mm (thin head) (METAL) 2.5mm x XA1-7200-457 M2.0-4.5mm (METAL) j XA4-9170-359 Self Tap M1.7-3.5mm (BLACK) 3.5mm y XA4-9170-457 Self Tap M1.7-4.5mm (METAL) 4.5mm k XA1-7170-407 M1.7-4.0mm (METAL) 4mm z XA4-9170-309 Self Tap M1.7-3.0mm (BLACK) 3mm l XA1-7170-307 M1.7-3.0mm (METAL) 3mm A XA4-9170-357 Self Tap M1.7-3.5mm (METAL) 3.5mm 4.5mm B XA4-9170-407 Self Tap M1.7-4.0mm (METAL) 4mm 1.3mm C XA9-1274-000 M1.7-3.0mm (METAL) 3mm Self Tap M1.7-4.0mm (BLACK) 4mm m XA9-1244-000 Stepped Screw M1.4-4.5mm (BLACK) n CB1-8698-000 M1.4-1.3mm (BLACK) o XA4-9170-609 Self Tap M1.7-6.0mm (BLACK) 6mm D XA4-9170-409 4-23 4.5mm ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 1-24 List of Disassembly Photos Right Cover Unit Left Cover Unit Left Cover FPC Separation of Top Cover Left Side Camera Unit 4-24 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT MMC P.C.B. Camera / Recorder Unit Finder Unit MAIN P.C.B. / AUDIO P.C.B. 4-25 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2. Adjustment Procedures 2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly. ○ : Adjustment required Camera system Part name No. Adjustment item Lens SUB PCB CCD MAIN PCB Adjustment setting 2-2 AF section 2-2-1 CZ Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition 2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check ○ ○ ○ Product condition ○ Product condition ○ Product condition ○ Product condition 2-3 IS section 2-3-1 Gyro Offset Auto Adjustment 2-3-2 Gyro Gain Adjustment 2-3-3 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ 2-4 Camera section 2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition 2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ○ ○ ○ Product condition 2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition ○ ○ ○ Product condition 2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) 2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) ○ ○ ○ Product condition 2-4-6 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ ○ Product condition 2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ○ ○ Product condition Recorder system Part name No. Adjustment item MAIN DMC PCB II Adjustment setting 2-6 Recorder section 2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination ○ Product condition 2-6-2, 2-6-3 Y LEVEL / C LEVEL Adjustment ○ Product condition 2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ○ Product condition ○ 2-6-5 SWP Adjustment 2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment ○ Product condition ○ ○ Product condition 2-6-7 EQ Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition 2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ○ Product condition DMC II 2-7 T ape Path Adjustment ○ 4-26 T ape path adjustment setting ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-2 AF Section Adjustment Preparation) 1) 2) For CZ adjustment/zoom performance check, set the product condition. Adjustment condition (initial condition) Program AE : Auto Mode ZOOM : Telephoto-end CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens front Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.) 2-2-1 CZ Adjustment CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart Automatic adjustment : At STEP 3, DT : AA should be attained and the specified zoom performance shall be satisfied. Procedure) (1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV. (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ adjustment in the service mode. (3) Turn power OFF and then ON, and check the zoom performance. ST EP PROCEDURE CZ 1 1) Make the setting shown 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2 1) Make the setting shown 2) Press the ST ORE key. 3 1) Make the setting shown 2) Press the ST ORE key. 4 1) Make the setting shown 2) Press the ST ORE key. 5 at right. at right. at right. at right. Judgment on result of adjustment MONIT OR MD ADDR DT WR **00 31 RD ↑ ↑ WR 313A 90 RD ↑ ↑ WR **00 31 RD ↑ ↑ WR 3100 00 ↑ ↑ 01~08 PG 5 ↑ 5 ↑ 5 ↑ 5 ↑ BK 1 ↑ 0 ↑ 3 ↑ 2 ↑ 5 2 RD 3100 AA ↑ ↑ RD ↑ FF Microcomputer operation ST WAIT OK WAIT OK WAIT OK WAIT BUSY High address "31'" is set up. Date setting for adjustment is completed. High address "31'" is set up. Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG condition is encountered in automatic adjustment, check the parts inside the lens OK Adjustment is completed (result is OK). Carry out the zoom performance check. NG Adjustment is completed (result is NG). T ake the procedure again from the beginning. 2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart “DT at address 30D2=”01" in steps (3),(4) below Difference between “DTs at address 30D3” in steps (3),(4) below is within “±4 Hex”. Procedure) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV, and set AF OFF. Perform slow-speed zooming from the telephoto position to the wide-angle position. Make sure that defocusing does not occur. At the wide-angle setting, read out data at the focus position according to the table below. Turn AF ON, and read out data at the focus position as in (3) above. Check whether or not the data read out in (3) and (4) satisfies the specification. Turn power OFF and then ON. Carry out zooming several times reciprocally for a distant object and check that defocusing does not occur. (AF ON) (7) If the results of check at steps (2), (5) and (6) are OK, the adjustment is completed. If the results are NG, carry out CZ adjustment again. ST EP PROCEDURE ZOOM CHECK 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 2 1) Read out data in the setting shown at right. PG 5 ↑ 5 ↑ BK 1 ↑ 0 ↑ MONIT OR MD ADDR WR **00 RD ↑ RD 30D2 ↑ 30D3 4-27 Microcomputer operation DT ST 30 WAIT OK High address "30" is set up. ↑ "--" WAIT Data at address 30D2 is indicated. "--" ↑ Data at address 30D3 is indicated. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-3 IS Section Adjustment Note) 1) Carry out the adjustment on a tripod or a vibration-free bench. Preparation) 1) Carry out IS adjustment in a product status. <Preparation for IS adjustment> ST EP 1 PROCEDURE IS ADJ MODE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 BK 3 ↑ ↑ MONIT OR MD ADDR DT WR **00 32 RD **00 ↑ Microcomputer operation ST WAIT OK High address "32" is set up. 2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment SPEC. Automatic adjusutment Procedure) (1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera. (2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment. ST EP PROCEDURE GYRO OFFSET 1 MONIT OR PG BK 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3206 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD Microcomputer operation MD ADDR DT ↑ ST 00 WAIT ↑ OK Adjustment is completed. 2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment SPEC. Date Writing Procedure) (1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below. ST EP PROCEDURE GYRO GAIN 1 1-1 MONIT OR PG BK 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3200 2) Press the ST ORE key ↑ ↑ RD Microcomputer operation MD ADDR DT ST Gyro YAW gain adjustment ↑ 2 Gyro PIT CH gain adjustment 2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3201 2) Press the ST ORE key ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 66 WAIT ↑ OK 6F WAIT ↑ OK Adjustment is completed. Adjustment is completed. 2-3-3 EEPROM Writing SPEC. Automatic writing Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, write the adjustment data (from 2-3-1 through 2) into EEPROM. ST EP PROCEDURE EEPROM WRIT ING 1 MONIT OR PG BK 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3208 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD Microcomputer operation MD ADDR DT ↑ 4-28 ST 00 WAIT ↑ OK Writing is completed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-4 Camera Section Adjustment Notes) 1) Each adjustment data (2-4-1 to 2-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the EEPROM as mentioned in 2-4-6. If power must 2) be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the EEPROM write procedure as mentioned in 2-4-6. The adjustments from 2-4-2 through 2-4-5 must be carried out in series. Preparation) 1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition. 2) Adjustment condition (initial condition) Program AE : Auto Mode AF Image stabilizer : OFF : OFF Chart : Standard angle of view <Preparation for camera adjustment> (1) Referring to the table shown below, set the high address for camera adjustment mode. ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CAM ADJ MODE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 BK 3 ↑ ↑ MONIT OR MD ADDR DT WR **00 30 RD ↑ ↑ Microcomputer operation ST WAIT OK High address "30" is set up. 2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment CHART Light box (5600°K) SPEC. Automatic adjustment. Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris Encoder. ST EP 1 PROCEDURE IRIS ENC. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 BK 2 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ MONIT OR MD ADDR DT WR 3000 00 WR ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Microcomputer operation ST WAIT BUSY Adjustment is in progress. OK Adjustment is completed. 2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) CHART Light box (5600°K) SPEC. Automatic adjustment Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1). ST EP 1 PROCEDURE WB (1) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 BK 2 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ MONIT OR MD ADDR DT WR 3002 00 WR ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ 4-29 Microcomputer operation ST WAIT BUSY Adjustment is in progress. OK Adjustment is completed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart (white area at the left side) M.EQ. Vectorscope TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT SPEC. R : × 2.0(ratio to burst)104°, Ye : × 1.4 (ratio to burst) 168° Procedure) (1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope. ST EP R-Y GAIN B-Y GAIN R-Y MAT B-Y MAT PROCEDURE CB 1) In the setting shown at relevant data. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1) In the setting shown at relevant data. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1) In the setting shown at relevant data. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1) In the setting shown at relevant data. 2) Press the ST ORE key. right, adjust PG 5 BK 2 MONIT OR Microcomputer operation MD ADDR DT ST WR 3007 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. right, adjust ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ADJ OK Adjustment is completed. ↑ WR 3008 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. right, adjust ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ADJ OK Adjustment is completed. ↑ WR 3009 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. right, adjust ↑ 5 ↑ 2 RD ADJ OK Adjustment is completed. ↑ WR 300A "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed. 2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) CHART SPEC. Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filter Automatic adjustment Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (2). ST EP 1 PROCEDURE WB (2) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 ↑ ↑ MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 2 WR 3004 00 ↑ WR ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ ↑ Microcomputer operation ST WAIT BUSY Adjustment is in progress. OK Adjustment is completed. 2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) CHART SPEC. Light box (5600°K) Automatic adjustment Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (3). ST EP 1 PROCEDURE WB (3) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 ↑ ↑ MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 2 WR 3005 00 ↑ WR ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ ↑ Microcomputer operation ST WAIT BUSY Adjustment is in progress. OK Adjustment is completed. 2-4-6 EEPROM Writing SPEC. Automatic writing Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, write adjustment data (from 2-4-1 to 2-4-5) into the EEPROM. ST EP 1 PROCEDURE EEPROM WRIT ING 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 ↑ MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 2 WR 3006 00 RD ↑ ↑ ↑ 4-30 Microcomputer operation ST WAIT OK Writing is completed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation Notes) 1) 2) Perform this adjustment only if a void pixel is found on the CCD. Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for more than 15 minutes. 3) The automatic mode (2-5-1) and the manual mode (2-5-2) are available for this adjustment. In the automatic adjustment mode, “NG” is recognized if there are more than two void pixels on the center area of the screen or more than eight void pixels on the entire screen. (If NG is recognized, the automatic adjustment is not performed.) In the manual adjustment mode, it is allowed to correct up to eight void pixels on the entire screen. In this mode, an arbitrary point may be selected for correction. 2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic) Preparation) 1) Carry out this correction in the product state. 2) Adjustment Conditions Program AE : AUTO AF Image stabilizer : OFF : OFF Demo mode : OFF Procedure) (1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below. ST EP 1 1-1 2 2-1 3 3-1 PROCEDURE CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. High address setting 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. CCD void pixel correction 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. EEPROM writing 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 5 3 ↑ WR **00 RD ↑ 30 ↑ 5 2 WR 300E 00 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ RD ↑ −− 5 2 ↑ ↑ WR 300F RD ↑ ↑ ↑ * If the DT is “FF” , it is “NG” even through the ST is “OK”. 4-31 ↑ 00 ↑ Microcomputer operation ST WAIT OK High address "30" is set up. WAIT BUSY Adjustment is in progress. OK Adjustment is completed. * WAIT OK Writing is completed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual) Note) 1) Use the full scan monitor for this adjustment. Preparation) 1) 2) Take the product condition for this adjustment. Adjustment conditions Program AE : LOW LIGHT AF : OFF Image stabilizer : OFF Electronic zoom : OFF M.EQ. Monitor TV Procedure) (1) Before switching to the service mode, press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen. (2) Select the service mode, and then set up the CCD void pixel correction adjustment mode (manual) following the table given below. ST EP 1 2 3 PROCEDURE CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG 5 ↑ 5 MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 3 WR **00 FF RD ↑ ↑ ↑ 2 RD FF00 00 5 3 ↑ ↑ WR FFFF RD ↑ *Angle of CCD for selection DT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 ↑ WAIT See table below for angle of CCD. OK for selection. (Unused marker is appeared at view angle of "Area"G.) CCD F Area A B C D E F G 06 Microcomputer operation ST WAIT OK High address "FF" is set up. WAIT Entering the CCD pixel missing compensation mode is complete. (AGC MAX., Iris close) Angle of section No shift (normal angle) Sectioning at top center Sectioning at bottom center Sectioning at top right Sectioning at bottom right Sectioning at top left Sectioning at bottom left B D Electronic Vibration-proof Pixel area A (Normal field of view) G C E Fig. 4-22 (3) Press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen. (4) Move an unused marker (arranged at left of screen) to the position where a pixel is missing. The movement is done by changing the data at the address corresponding to each marker. The addresses corresponding to the markers are shown in Fig.4-23 Notes) 1) The odd-numbered marker is for odd-numbered lines (ODD) and the even-numbered marker is for even-numbered lines (EVEN). If the marker cannot be aligned with a pixel void position, use the marker for a different line. 4-32 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2) As shown in the Fig.4-22, the pixel missing compensation over entire CCD area cannot be performed on a single screen due to the electronic vibration- proof area. Therefore, before the adjustment, change the data of the STEP 3 to select the area for compensation. If the marker is not appeared at this time, choose the area where the marker appears, move the marker toward the area for compensation until it appears on the desired area, and write the data temporarily. Then, select the compensation area again, and move the marker to the pixel void position. FULL SCAN MONITOR Marker Direction Address H FF01 1 V FF03 (ODD) H FF05 2 V FF07 (EVEN) H FF09 3 V FF0B (ODD) H FF0D 4 V FF0F (EVEN) H FF11 5 V FF13 (ODD) H FF15 6 V FF17 (EVEN) H FF19 7 V FF1B (ODD) H FF1D 8 V FF1F (EVEN) FF01 FF03 *Missing Fig. 4-23 * The following table shows the procedure for moving marker 1. ST EP 1 2 3 PROCEDURE CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. 1) Specify address in H direction and set WR mode. 2) Change the data and then move the marker (H direction). 3) Press the ST ORE key. 1) Specify address in V direction and set WR mode. 2) Change the data and then move the marker (H direction). 3) Press the ST ORE key. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, and register the marker at the position where pixel is missing. PG 5 MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 2 WR FF01 D4 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 5 ↑ 2 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ Microcomputer operation ST WAIT ADJ ↑ ↑ A0 OK WAIT ↑ ADJ ↑ ↑ ↑ OK ↑ ↑ WR FF03 (5) Carry out write-in to EEPROM according to the table below. ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. In case of markers 1 to 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. In case of markers 5 to 8 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Press the ST ORE key. PG MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT Microcomputer operation ST 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR FF20 RD ↑ 00 ↑ WAIT OK Writing is completed. 5 ↑ 2 ↑ WR FF21 RD ↑ 00 ↑ WAIT OK Writing is completed. (6) Reset the service mode, and close the lens. After ten seconds, check that missing pixels have been compensated for. Notes) 1) Since the marker is larger than a pixel, although they may seem to be superposed on one another at adjustment, there may actually 2) be some deviation. In marker overlap condition or when there are adjacent missing pixels within ±2 Hex in the V and H directions, writing is impossible. 4-33 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment Preparation) 1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state. 2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination SPEC. Data writing Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out the recorder setting for destination market place. ST EP 1 2 PROCEDURE RECORDER DEST INAT ION 1) Make the setting shown at right. 3) Press the ST ORE key. 1) Make the setting shown at right. (For USA model) 2) Make the setting shown at right (For Japan model) 3) Press the ST ORE key. PG 6 ↑ 6 MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 5 WR **00 01 RD ↑ ↑ ↑ 4 WR 0112 F0 6 4 WR 0112 ↑ ↑ RD ↑ Microcomputer operation ST * F1 F0orF1 High address "01" is set up. Function Select bit for USA Function Select bit for JPN * T he recorder setting for destination market place is completed. 2-6-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT M. EQ. Oscilloscope SPEC. Y=980 ± 20 [mV] Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Y level adjustment. 980 ± 20mV Fig.4-24 ST EP PROCEDURE Y LEVEL 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. PG 6 MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 4 WR 001E ↑ RD 2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ 3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ 4-34 Microcomputer operation ST ADJ ↑ "ADJ" ↑ ↑ White raster is output. Adjustment is in progress. * Adjustment is completed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-6-3 C LEVEL Adjustment TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT M. EQ. Oscilloscope SPEC. C=710 ± 20 [mV] Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out C level adjustment. 710 ± 20mV Fig.4-25 ST EP PROCEDURE C LEVEL 1 PG MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001F 2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ 3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ RD Microcomputer operation ST ADJ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ Green raster is output. Adjustment is in progress. * Adjustment is completed. 2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment SIGNAL COLOR BAR MODE E-E (ANALOG LINE IN) SPEC. Automatic adjustment Procedure) (1) Input a color bar signal to the analog line circuit from the pattern generator. (2) Carry out AGC initial value adjustment according to the table shown below. ST EP PROCEDURE AGC INIT IAL 1 PG MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT Microcomputer operation ST 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **04 -- 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed. 4-35 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-6-5 SWP Adjustment MODE SPEC. Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000) Automatic adjustment Note) 1) Press the STORE key after the error rate is stabilized. Procedure) (1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP adjustment referring to the table shown below. ST EP PROCEDURE SWP 1 MONIT OR Microcomputer operation PG BK MD ADDR DT ST 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **01 -- 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress. ↑ ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed. 2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment MODE SPEC. Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000) Automatic adjustment Procedure) (1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG adjustment referring to the table shown below. ST EP PROCEDURE C.FG 1 MONIT OR Microcomputer operation PG BK 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 MD ADDR DT WR **03 -- ST 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed. 2-6-7 EQ Adjustment MODE Playback of self-recording LP tape (conforming to the format of LP tape manufactured by Panasonic) SPEC. After adjustment, an error rate should be 2×10 -5 or less. Notes) 1) 2) For error rate measurement, use a tape conforming to the format of LP tape manufactured by Panasonic. For SP/LP selection in recording, use the Recorder menu. Procedure) (1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out EQ adjustment. (2) After adjustment, play the self-recorded LP part again and check that the error rate is within the allowable specified range. (3) If the result of check is NG, perform EQ adjustment using the self-recording SP tape. Then, with this LP tape, perform EQ adjustment again. ST EP PROCEDURE EQ 1 1) Start LP recording. 2 1) Rewind the recorded part, and then 3 1) During LP playback, make the MONIT OR Microcomputer operation PG BK MD ADDR DT ST 7 0 ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * start LP playing back. setting shown at right WR **02 -- 2) Press the ST ORE key. Automatic adjustment is in progress. (For approx. ten seconds) 4-36 Adjustment is completed. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT 2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON) SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.83 ± 0.02 [V] Note) 1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start. Procedure) (1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.83 ± 0.02[V]. (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment. ST EP PROCEDURE UNDER CUT 1 PG MONIT OR BK MD ADDR DT 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 2 WR **FF "ADJ" 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Microcomputer operation ST * Adjustment is completed. 2-7 Tape Path Adjustment Note) 1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC II Service Manual separately issued. Preparation) 1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 3-2). Procedure) (1) Referring to the table given below, playback the alignment tape for tracking adjustment (DY9-1345-000), and carry out tape path adjustment. At step 2, adjust DT in a range of 01 to 0F so that the RF envelope will be 70% for tracking shift. (2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift to the normal condition of the product state (DT: 00). ST EP 1 2 3 PROCEDURE MONIT OR T RACKING SHIFT PG BK MD ADDR DT ST 1) Play back the tracking tape. 1) During playback, make the setting 7 0 WR **FE 00 shown at right. 2) Perform 70% tracking shift by 01~0F ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ adjusting DT in a range of 01 to 0F. 1) Perform the tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift 4-37 Microcomputer operation Product setting Degree of tracking shift being changed. state. ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach the transparent chart on a vectorscope display. Color balance adjustment chart ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A NTSC R-Y R YL B-Y BURST 4-38 CHAPTER 5. PARTS LIST CONTEN EXPLODED VIEWS Casing Parts Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2 Right Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-4 Left Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6 Main Dial/Rear Cover Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-8 Recorder Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-10 LCD Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-12 Camera · Lens Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-14 CVF Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-16 Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-18 Mechanical Chassis Section-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-20 Mechanical Chassis Section-3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-22 Mechanical Chassis Section-4 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-24 Accessory Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-26 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-28 PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-29 CAUTION 1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks. Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list. 5-1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Casing Parts Section 5×2 1 6 7 Left Cover Unit 11 27 8 22 9 20 10 CVF Unit a 19 18 3 3 3 4 16×2 2 17 (26) (25) (23) (24) Camera • Lens/Recorder Unit 15 a 35×2 21 34 2×2 14 21×2 2 13×2 29 31 28 32 12 33 30 Right Cover Unit 5-2 34 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 XA4-9170-359 XA9-1001-000 XA1-7170-357 XA1-7170-407 DA2-1017-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 F F F F F 1 4 3 1 2 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 DA2-0931-000 DA2-1018-000 DA2-1015-000 DA2-1473-000 DA2-0868-000 000 000 000 000 000 B F F B C 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, TOP SCREW SCREW COVER, MIC SHEET, MIC 11 12 13 14 15 DA2-1021-000 D52-0130-000 CB1-8698-000 DF1-1630-000 DG1-4062-000 000 000 000 000 000 C B F B B 1 1 2 1 1 SEAL, LCD T LENS CAP ASS’Y SCREW LENS RING ASS’Y ZOOM SWITCH ASS’Y 16 17 18 19 20 XA1-7140-207 DA2-1024-000 DA2-1023-000 XA1-7170-257 XA9-1244-000 000 000 000 000 000 F C C F F 2 1 1 1 1 SCREW CUSHION CUSHION SCREW SCREW 21 22 23 24 25 XA1-7170-307 DG1-4314-000 DS1-5387-000 DA2-0844-000 DA2-1479-000 000 000 000 000 000 F B C C B 3 1 1 1 1 SCREW REAR COVER ASS’Y SPRING, COIL SHAFT, BATT LOCK KNOB, EJECT 26 27 28 29 30 DA2-1504-000 DG1-4096-000 DA2-1453-000 DA2-1454-000 DA2-1452-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, AV EYE PIECE ASS’Y COVER, REMOCON WINDOW COVER, TALLY WINDOW FRONT COVER ASS’Y 31 32 33 34 35 DA2-1020-000 DA2-1465-000 DA2-1466-000 DA2-1016-000 DA2-1455-000 000 000 000 000 000 C B B F F 2 1 1 2 2 MAGNET COVER, LCD HOLDER U COVER, LCD HOLDER L SCREW SCREW 5-3 REMARKS NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Right Cover Unit Section 7 5×2 4 6 24 3×2 13 2 20×2 1 22 21×2 17 12 10 15 8 18 9 11 19×2 14×2 16 LCD Unit 5-4 23 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DH2-2183-000 DG1-4079-000 XA1-7170-307 DA2-1025-000 XA9-1000-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C F C F 1 1 2 2 2 FPC, BATTERY BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y SCREW CUSHION SCREW 6 7 8 9 10 DA2-0918-000 DA2-1470-000 DA2-1462-000 DA2-1467-000 DA2-1461-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C B B B 1 1 1 1 1 PLATE, FPC SHEET, INSULATION COVER, GRIP TAPE, GRIP COVER COVER, RIGHT 11 12 13 14 15 DA2-1472-000 DA2-0843-000 DA2-0842-000 DA2-0845-000 DA2-1008-000 000 000 000 000 000 B C C B B 1 1 1 2 1 HOLDER, HAND STRAP TRIPOD SHAFT, GRIP BELT CUSHION, R COVER CUSHION, BATTERY 16 17 18 19 20 XA4-9170-457 DA2-0917-000 DS1-5380-000 XA1-7200-457 DA2-1009-000 000 000 000 000 000 F B C F B 1 1 1 2 2 SCREW COVER, FPC SPRING, COIL SCREW CUSHION, LCD 21 22 23 DA2-1007-000 DA2-1014-000 DG1-4316-000 DG1-4097-000 DA2-1506-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B B B C 2 1 1 1 1 SEAL, R COVER LABEL, CAUTION RECORDER KEY ASS’Y RECORDER KEY ASS’Y SHEET, JACK 24 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 5-5 REMARKS NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A NEW ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Left Cover Unit Section a 6 9 17 Rear Cover 11 28 14 a 13 22 See the figure below. 12 15 Main Dial Ass’y 21 19 18×2 23 18 3 10 16×2 18×2 22×2 25 24 4 1 2 27 31 26×2 ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A 30 9 7 5 6 29 8 20 5-6 32 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DA2-1451-000 DA2-0952-000 DA2-0991-000 DA2-0953-000 XA9-1274-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 B C B C F 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, LEFT HOLDER, FPC LABEL, LITHIUM 2 HOLDER, EJECT SW SCREW DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 XA9-1001-000 DA2-1009-000 DH2-4055-000 XA9-1000-000 DA2-0980-000 000 000 000 000 000 F B C F B 2 1 1 2 1 SCREW CUSHION, LCD FPC, MMC-MAIN SCREW COVER, CARD 11 12 13 14 DA2-0981-000 DA2-0950-000 DA2-0881-000 DA2-0883-000 DA2-0944-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B C C B 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, CARD KNOB, P.SCAN SPRING, PLATE TAPE, C COVER PLATE, DIAL 15 16 17 18 19 XA4-9140-287 XA9-1002-000 DA2-1471-000 XA1-7170-207 XA1-7170-357 000 000 000 000 000 F F B F F 1 2 1 5 1 SCREW SCREW STRAP, HAND SCREW SCREW 20 21 22 23 DG1-4078-000 DG1-4289-000 DG1-4290-000 XA1-7170-257 DA2-0994-000 000 000 000 000 000 B C C F B 1 1 1 3 1 COVER ASS’Y, MMC PCB ASS’Y, MMC PCB ASS’Y, MMC SCREW HOLDER, GRIP BELT 24 25 26 27 28 DA2-0993-000 DF1-1624-000 XA1-7170-307 XA9-1004-000 XA1-7170-607 000 000 000 000 000 C C F F F 1 1 2 1 1 SHEET, MMC CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y SCREW SCREW SCREW 29 30 31 32 DA2-0986-000 DA2-0845-000 DA2-1156-000 DA2-0967-000 000 000 000 000 B B C C 1 1 1 1 LABEL, CAUTION CUSHION, R COVER GUIDE, C ARM COVER, SD HOLDER 5-7 REMARKS NEW ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A NEW NEW NEW ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Main Dial/Rear Cover Section 10 8 9 7 6 5×2 11 4 3 2 1 (16) 14 13 (17) 12 15 5-8 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DA2-0978-000 DA2-0976-000 DA2-0977-000 DG1-4029-000 XA9-1004-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C F 1 1 1 1 2 HOLDER, LITHIUM LITHIUM TERMINAL + LITHIUM TERMINAL PCB ASS’Y, LITHIUM SCREW 6 7 8 9 10 DA2-0974-000 DS1-5385-000 DA2-0973-000 DA2-1486-000 DA2-0990-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C B B B 1 1 1 1 1 HOLDER, TRIGGER SPRING, COIL KEY, TRIGGER KNOB, AP LABEL, LITHIUM 1 11 12 13 14 15 DA2-1483-000 DG1-4054-000 DA2-1485-000 DA2-1487-000 DG1-4309-000 000 000 000 000 000 B C B B B 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, CASSETTE REAR FPC ASS’Y, FE KNOB, OPEN KNOB, FE MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW DG1-4312-000 DA2-1474-000 DA2-1477-000 XA9-1252-000 000 000 000 000 B B B F 1 1 1 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y COVER, M DIAL COVER, M DIAL SCREW NEW ELURA10 A NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A 16 17 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 5-9 REMARKS NEW NEW NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Recorder Unit Section Camera • Lens Unit 2 1 3 23 9 22 10 16×2 17×2 15 21 30 20 18 31 7 38 24 6×3 8 19 4 11 5 32 26 12 6 25 13×2 14×2 33 27 34 28 35 6 29 6×2 6 39 36 5-10 37 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DY1-8282-000 DA1-9796-000 DA1-9903-000 DA2-0859-000 DY1-8273-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 C B B C C 1 1 1 1 1 RECORDER UNIT DMC II LABEL, CASSETTE LABEL, S CHASSIS HOLDER, RECORDER PCB ASS’Y, SUB DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 XA1-7170-257 DA2-0860-000 DA2-1151-000 DA2-0897-000 DA2-1152-000 000 000 000 000 000 F C C C C 8 1 1 1 1 SCREW RUBBER, INSULATION CUSHION SHEET, INSULATION CUSHION 11 12 13 14 15 DA1-9788-000 XA9-1260-000 DA1-9779-000 XA9-1167-000 XA9-1001-000 000 000 000 000 000 F F C F F 1 1 2 2 1 WASHER SCREW RUBBER, INSULATION SCREW SCREW 16 17 18 19 20 DA2-0896-000 XA9-1244-000 DA2-0880-000 DA2-1028-000 DG1-4023-050 000 000 000 000 000 C F C C C 2 2 1 1 1 RUBBER, INSULATION SCREW SHEET, INSULATION SHEET, AUDIO 2 PCB ASS’Y, AUDIO 21 22 23 24 25 DG1-4056-000 DA2-0997-000 DA2-0867-000 DA2-0858-000 DH2-2174-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 MIC ASS’Y SHEET, MIC FPC RUBBER, MIC RUBBER, INSULATION FPC ASS’Y, MULTI-AUDIO 26 27 28 29 DY1-8379-000 DY1-8381-000 DA2-0863-000 DH2-2175-000 DH2-2182-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN PCB ASS’Y, MAIN CASE, SHIELD MAIN 1 FPC ASS’Y, SUB-MAIN FPC ASS’Y, HA SHIELD 30 31 32 33 34 DA2-1158-000 DA2-1027-000 DA2-0865-000 DA2-0846-000 DG1-4028-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 SHEET, SDRAM SHEET, AUDIO 1 CASE, SHIELD MAIN 2 SHEET, MAIN PCB ASS’Y, MULTI 35 36 37 38 39 DA2-0855-000 DA2-0832-000 DG1-4051-000 DG1-3978-000 DA2-0895-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C B 1 1 1 1 1 PLATE, GND HOLDER, MULTI FPC ASS’Y, JACK FPC ASS’Y SUB-DMC LABEL, FUSE 5-11 REMARKS NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A NEW ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A LCD Unit Section 15 14 13 9 6 7 12 8 16 17 11 2 8 18 10 19 1×2 8 20 3 21 4 5 23 22 26 24 25×5 5-12 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL *1 *2 CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 XA4-9170-409 DA2-0915-000 DG1-4065-000 DG1-4052-000 DA2-0914-000 000 000 000 000 000 F B C C B 2 1 1 1 1 SCREW COVER, HINGE L HINGE ASS’Y, LCD FPC ASS’Y, LCD SW COVER, HINGE R 6 7 8 9 10 DA2-1020-000 DA2-1019-000 XA1-7170-257 DA2-1464-000 DA2-0907-000 000 000 000 000 000 C B F B C 1 1 3 1 1 MAGNET SEAL, MAGNET SCREW COVER, LCD BOTTOM PLATE, LCD2 11 12 13 14 15 DA2-0906-000 XA4-9170-359 DA2-0909-000 DA2-0908-000 DS1-5380-000 000 000 000 000 000 C F C B C 1 1 1 1 1 PLATE, LCD1 SCREW SHAFT, LCD LOCK KNOB, LCD SPRING, COIL 16 DH9-0831-000 DY1-8274-000 DG1-7377-000 DA2-0910-000 DG1-4024-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 LCD ASS’Y LCD ASS’Y BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (LCD) SHEET, LCD1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD 22 23 DA2-0911-000 DA2-1463-000 DA2-1498-000 DH2-2177-000 DA2-0912-000 000 000 000 000 000 C B B C C 1 1 1 1 1 SHEET, LCD2 COVER, LCD TOP COVER, LCD TOP FPC, LCD-MAIN CUSHION 24 25 26 DA2-1012-000 000 DA2-1015-000 000 DA2-1160-000 000 C F B 1 5 1 SHEET, FPC SCREW SHEET, LCD FPC 17 18 19 20 21 PART NO. DESCRIPTION *1 : Same quality as the production line. *2 : Free from the pixel dot. 5-13 REMARKS NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Camera · Lens Unit Section 14 (5) (4) 13×2 11 16 15 12 17 (5) 10 (5) 9 8 2 2 3 1 (7) (6) (5) (5) 5-14 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DA2-0945-000 DA2-1026-000 DG1-4066-000 YH8-0097-000 XA4-9170-407 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C F 1 2 1 1 5 RUBBER, LENS CUSHION LENS ASS’Y IG METER ASS’Y SCREW DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 YH7-0200-000 YH7-0201-000 DH9-0836-000 DA2-0862-000 DY1-8271-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 MOTOR, PZ MOTOR, AF FILTER, IR RUBBER, INSULATION CCD ASS’Y 11 12 13 14 15 DA2-0899-000 DG1-4025-000 XA4-9170-609 DG1-4026-000 DH2-2178-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C F C C 1 1 2 1 1 PLATE, GRAPHITE CCD PCB ASS’Y, CCD SCREW PCB ASS’Y, CA FPC ASS’Y, CA-MAIN 16 17 DA2-1159-000 000 XD1-1101-825 000 F F 1 1 WASHER WASHER 5-15 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A CVF Unit Section 13 12 11 14 10 9 8 7 3 4 2 17 15 5 1 6 16 5-16 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 XA4-9170-309 DA2-0896-000 DA2-0869-000 DG1-4027-000 XA4-9170-357 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 F C C C F 1 1 1 1 1 SCREW RUBBER, INSULATION PLATE, CVF PCB ASS’Y, CVF SCREW DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 DH2-2179-000 DG1-4067-000 DA2-0884-000 DA2-0885-000 DA2-0870-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 FPC ASS’Y, CVF-MAIN BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF) CUSHION RUBBER, INSULATION HOLDER, CVF 11 12 13 14 15 DF1-1628-000 DA2-0877-000 CB1-5509-000 DS1-5386-000 WG2-5194-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C F C C 1 1 1 1 1 CVF LEVER ASS’Y PLATE, FINDER RELEASE NUT, ONEWAY GEAR SPRING, COIL LCD ASS’Y, CVF 16 17 DA2-0873-000 000 DA1-9760-000 000 C C 1 1 PLATE, LCD STOPPER PLATE, MASK 5-17 REMARKS DMC II Mechanical Chassis Section-1 (2) 1 (3) 8 (9) 4 5×4 6 7 2×3 Slide Chassis Ass’y 10 11 12 5-18 DMC II MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DG1-3861-000 DA2-0642-000 DF1-1569-000 DA2-0646-000 DA2-0643-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 C F C F F 1 4 1 1 4 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y SCREW CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y WASHER SCREW DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 DF1-1514-000 DG1-3857-000 DY1-8283-000 DA2-0793-000 DY1-8210-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C E C C 1 1 1 1 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y DRUM ASS’Y (3CH) PLATE, TAPE GUIDE MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y 11 12 DA2-0758-000 000 DA2-0757-000 000 C F 1 1 SPRING, PLATE SCREW 5-19 REMARKS DMC II Mechanical Chassis Section-2 1 (8) (2) (7) (3) (5)×2 (12) (4) (6) (10) (9) (13) (14) (18) 19 (15) (5) (11) (14) (16) 5-20 (17) DMC II MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DY1-8211-000 DA2-0712-000 DA2-0646-000 DA2-0703-000 DA2-0642-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 C C F C F 1 1 1 1 3 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y SPRING, COIL WASHER EJECT LEVER SCREW DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 DA2-0661-000 DS1-0175-000 DG1-3859-000 DS1-0172-000 DF1-1566-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER SPRING, COIL REVIEW ARM ASS’Y SPRING, COIL BRAKE, T SUB 11 12 13 14 15 DA2-0782-000 DA2-0660-000 DF1-1548-000 DA2-0645-000 DF1-1549-000 000 000 000 000 000 F C C F C 1 1 1 2 1 WASHER COVER, REVIEW ARM TENSION ARM ASS’Y WASHER TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y 16 17 18 19 DS1-0169-000 DH9-0812-000 DA2-0643-000 DS1-0173-000 000 000 000 000 C C F C 1 1 1 1 SPRING, COIL TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y SCREW SPRING, COIL 5-21 REMARKS DMC II Mechanical Chassis Section-3 8 1×2 9 7 10 2 12×3 3 11 5 14 6 4 6 15 17 21 12×2 16 13 FACE 20 22×2 19 5-22 18 DMC II MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 DA2-0780-000 DA2-0645-000 DA2-0747-000 DF1-1546-000 DF1-1547-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 F F C C C 2 1 1 1 1 SCREW WASHER GUIDE RAIL ARM ASS’Y, S ARM ASS’Y, T DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 DA2-0781-000 DF1-1544-000 DF1-1550-000 DA2-0774-000 DF1-1545-000 000 000 000 000 000 F C C C C 2 1 1 2 2 WASHER T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y POST RING, RUBBER SKATE ASS’Y 11 12 13 14 15 DF1-1551-000 DA2-0644-000 DG1-3865-000 DA2-0646-000 DF1-1567-000 000 000 000 000 000 C F C F C 1 5 1 1 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y SCREW LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y WASHER LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE 16 17 18 19 20 DG1-3858-000 DS1-0174-000 XD2-1100-102 DF1-1517-000 DA2-0586-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER SPRING, COIL E RING PLATE, DRIVE GEAR GEAR, CP 21 22 DH2-2115-000 000 XA1-7140-147 000 C F 1 2 FPC, LOADING MOTOR SCREW 5-23 REMARKS DMC II Mechanical Chassis Section-4 5 5 8 10 6 12 1×2 7 9 11 2 3 1 4 REAR FACE 13 14 5-24 DMC II MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY 1 2 3 4 5 XA1-7140-147 DF1-1525-000 DA2-0590-000 DF1-1520-000 DA2-0643-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 F C C C F 3 1 1 1 2 SCREW GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS. GEAR, CAM 2 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL SCREW DESCRIPTION 6 7 8 9 10 DF1-1516-000 DF1-1518-000 DA2-0640-000 DG1-3860-000 DA2-0666-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 GEAR, CAM 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE COVER, MODE GEAR GEAR, MODE COVER, LM GEAR 11 12 13 14 DA2-0604-000 DA2-0630-000 DA2-0638-000 DF1-1522-000 000 000 000 000 C C C C 1 1 1 1 GEAR, LM LEVER, LOAD HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER LEVER, SLIDE 5-25 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A Accessory Section 1 CA-400 4 BP-406/412/422 2 JPN DU-300 A E PLUG TYPE SDC-8M WL-D75/76 B AS 5 3 (6) (7) 5-26 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MECHANICAL PARTS SYMBOL CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION 1 2 3 4 5 DY1-8276-000 D82-0642-000 DY1-8383-000 D82-0660-000 D83-0562-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-406 CORD, AC(A) CARD, SD SDC-8M DOCKING UNIT DU-300 WL-D75A WIRELESS CONTROLLER 6 7 D83-0572-000 000 DY1-8121-000 000 DY1-8119-000 000 C C C 1 1 1 WL-D76A WIRELESS CONTROLLER COVER, BATTERY LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A) 5-27 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A ELECTRICAL PARTS SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY CN100 CN101 CN102 CN200 CN1401 VS1-6640-027 VS1-6640-025 VS1-6674-005 VS1-6640-027 VS1-6674-006 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, 27P 25P 5P 27P 6P CN1402 CN1501 CN1502 CN3201 CN3202 VS1-6640-031 VS1-6640-021 VS1-6640-027 VS1-6307-014 VS1-6640-027 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, 31P 21P 27P 14P 27P CN3401 FU3201 FU3202 JC SW WS1-5879-000 WD1-5062-000 WD1-5062-000 WS1-5524-000 WC4-5155-000 000 000 000 000 000 C D D C C 1 1 1 1 1 CONNECTOR, DV FUSE FUSE JACK, A/V SWITCH, TRIGGER WC5-5134-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, DIAL SW101 DESCRIPTION 5-28 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A PARTS LIST PAGE CLASS Q’TY 17 3 3 27 27 CB1-5509-000 CB1-8698-000 D52-0130-000 D82-0642-000 D82-0660-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 F F B C C 1 2 1 1 1 NUT, ONEWAY GEAR SCREW LENS CAP ASS’Y CORD, AC(A) DOCKING UNIT DU-300 DESCRIPTION 27 27 17 11 11 D83-0562-000 D83-0572-000 DA1-9760-000 DA1-9779-000 DA1-9788-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C F 1 1 1 2 1 WL-D75A WIRELESS CONTROLLER WL-D76A WIRELESS CONTROLLER PLATE, MASK RUBBER, INSULATION WASHER 11 11 23 25 25 DA1-9796-000 DA1-9903-000 DA2-0586-000 DA2-0590-000 DA2-0604-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B C C C 1 1 1 1 1 LABEL, CASSETTE LABEL, S CHASSIS GEAR, CP GEAR, CAM 2 GEAR, LM 25 25 25 19,21 19,21,25 DA2-0630-000 DA2-0638-000 DA2-0640-000 DA2-0642-000 DA2-0643-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C F F 1 1 1 7 7 LEVER, LOAD HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER COVER, MODE GEAR SCREW SCREW 23 21,23 19,21,23 21 21 DA2-0644-000 DA2-0645-000 DA2-0646-000 DA2-0660-000 DA2-0661-000 000 000 000 000 000 F F F C C 5 3 3 1 1 SCREW WASHER WASHER COVER, REVIEW ARM COVER, PINCH ROLLER 25 21 21 23 19 DA2-0666-000 DA2-0703-000 DA2-0712-000 DA2-0747-000 DA2-0757-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C F 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, LM GEAR EJECT LEVER SPRING, COIL GUIDE RAIL SCREW 19 23 23 23 21 DA2-0758-000 DA2-0774-000 DA2-0780-000 DA2-0781-000 DA2-0782-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C F F F 1 2 2 2 1 SPRING, PLATE POST RING, RUBBER SCREW WASHER WASHER 19 11 5 5 3 DA2-0793-000 DA2-0832-000 DA2-0842-000 DA2-0843-000 DA2-0844-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE HOLDER, MULTI SHAFT, GRIP BELT TRIPOD SHAFT, BATT LOCK 5,7 11 11 11 11 DA2-0845-000 DA2-0846-000 DA2-0855-000 DA2-0858-000 DA2-0859-000 000 000 000 000 000 B C C C C 3 1 1 1 1 CUSHION, R COVER SHEET, MAIN PLATE, GND RUBBER, INSULATION HOLDER, RECORDER 11 15 11 11 11 DA2-0860-000 DA2-0862-000 DA2-0863-000 DA2-0865-000 DA2-0867-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 RUBBER, INSULATION RUBBER, INSULATION CASE, SHIELD MAIN 1 CASE, SHIELD MAIN 2 RUBBER, MIC 3 17 17 17 17 DA2-0868-000 DA2-0869-000 DA2-0870-000 DA2-0873-000 DA2-0877-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 SHEET, MIC PLATE, CVF HOLDER, CVF PLATE, LCD STOPPER PLATE, FINDER RELEASE 11 7 7 17 17 DA2-0880-000 DA2-0881-000 DA2-0883-000 DA2-0884-000 DA2-0885-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 SHEET, INSULATION SPRING, PLATE TAPE, C COVER CUSHION RUBBER, INSULATION 5-29 REMARKS ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A PARTS LIST PAGE CLASS Q’TY 11 11,17 11 15 13 DA2-0895-000 DA2-0896-000 DA2-0897-000 DA2-0899-000 DA2-0906-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 B C C C C 1 3 1 1 1 LABEL, FUSE RUBBER, INSULATION SHEET, INSULATION PLATE, GRAPHITE CCD PLATE, LCD1 DESCRIPTION 13 13 13 13 13 DA2-0907-000 DA2-0908-000 DA2-0909-000 DA2-0910-000 DA2-0911-000 000 000 000 000 000 C B C C C 1 1 1 1 1 PLATE, LCD2 KNOB, LCD SHAFT, LCD LOCK SHEET, LCD1 SHEET, LCD2 13 13 13 5 5 DA2-0912-000 DA2-0914-000 DA2-0915-000 DA2-0917-000 DA2-0918-000 000 000 000 000 000 C B B B C 1 1 1 1 1 CUSHION COVER, HINGE R COVER, HINGE L COVER, FPC PLATE, FPC 3 7 15 7 7 DA2-0931-000 DA2-0944-000 DA2-0945-000 DA2-0950-000 DA2-0952-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B C B C 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, TOP PLATE, DIAL RUBBER, LENS KNOB, P.SCAN HOLDER, FPC 7 7 9 9 9 DA2-0953-000 DA2-0967-000 DA2-0973-000 DA2-0974-000 DA2-0976-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C B C C 1 1 1 1 1 HOLDER, EJECT SW COVER, SD HOLDER KEY, TRIGGER HOLDER, TRIGGER LITHIUM TERMINAL + 9 9 7 7 7 DA2-0977-000 DA2-0978-000 DA2-0980-000 DA2-0981-000 DA2-0986-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C B B B 1 1 1 1 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL HOLDER, LITHIUM COVER, CARD COVER, CARD LABEL, CAUTION 9 7 7 7 11 DA2-0990-000 DA2-0991-000 DA2-0993-000 DA2-0994-000 DA2-0997-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B C B C 1 1 1 1 1 LABEL, LITHIUM 1 LABEL, LITHIUM 2 SHEET, MMC HOLDER, GRIP BELT SHEET, MIC FPC 5 5 5,7 13 5 DA2-1007-000 DA2-1008-000 DA2-1009-000 DA2-1012-000 DA2-1014-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B B C B 2 1 3 1 1 SEAL, R COVER CUSHION, BATTERY CUSHION, LCD SHEET, FPC LABEL, CAUTION 3,13 3 3 3 13 DA2-1015-000 DA2-1016-000 DA2-1017-000 DA2-1018-000 DA2-1019-000 000 000 000 000 000 F F F F B 6 2 2 1 1 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SEAL, MAGNET 3,13 3 3 3 5 DA2-1020-000 DA2-1021-000 DA2-1023-000 DA2-1024-000 DA2-1025-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 3 1 1 1 2 MAGNET SEAL, LCD T CUSHION CUSHION CUSHION 15 11 11 11 11 DA2-1026-000 DA2-1027-000 DA2-1028-000 DA2-1151-000 DA2-1152-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 2 1 1 1 1 CUSHION SHEET, AUDIO 1 SHEET, AUDIO 2 CUSHION CUSHION 7 11 15 13 7 DA2-1156-000 DA2-1158-000 DA2-1159-000 DA2-1160-000 DA2-1451-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C F B B 1 1 1 1 1 GUIDE, SHEET, WASHER SHEET, COVER, 5-30 C ARM SDRAM LCD FPC LEFT REMARKS NEW NEW ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A NEW NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A PARTS LIST PAGE CLASS Q’TY 3 3 3 3 5 DA2-1452-000 DA2-1453-000 DA2-1454-000 DA2-1455-000 DA2-1461-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 B B B F B 1 1 1 2 1 FRONT COVER ASS’Y COVER, REMOCON WINDOW COVER, TALLY WINDOW SCREW COVER, RIGHT DESCRIPTION NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW 5 13 13 3 3 DA2-1462-000 DA2-1463-000 DA2-1464-000 DA2-1465-000 DA2-1466-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, COVER, COVER, COVER, COVER, NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW NEW NEW 5 5 7 5 3 DA2-1467-000 DA2-1470-000 DA2-1471-000 DA2-1472-000 DA2-1473-000 000 000 000 000 000 B C B B B 1 1 1 1 1 TAPE, GRIP COVER SHEET, INSULATION STRAP, HAND HOLDER, HAND STRAP COVER, MIC NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW 9 9 3 9 9 DA2-1474-000 DA2-1477-000 DA2-1479-000 DA2-1483-000 DA2-1485-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B B B B 1 1 1 1 1 COVER, M DIAL COVER, M DIAL KNOB, EJECT COVER, CASSETTE REAR KNOB, OPEN NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A NEW NEW NEW 9 9 13 3 5 DA2-1486-000 DA2-1487-000 DA2-1498-000 DA2-1504-000 DA2-1506-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B B B C 1 1 1 1 1 KNOB, AP KNOB, FE COVER, LCD TOP COVER, AV SHEET, JACK NEW NEW NEW ELURA10 A NEW NEW 19 25 23 25 25 DF1-1514-000 DF1-1516-000 DF1-1517-000 DF1-1518-000 DF1-1520-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y GEAR, CAM 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR LEVER ASS’Y, MODE LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL 25 25 23 23 23 DF1-1522-000 DF1-1525-000 DF1-1544-000 DF1-1545-000 DF1-1546-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 2 1 LEVER, SLIDE GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS. T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y SKATE ASS’Y ARM ASS’Y, S 23 21 21 23 23 DF1-1547-000 DF1-1548-000 DF1-1549-000 DF1-1550-000 DF1-1551-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 ARM ASS’Y, T TENSION ARM ASS’Y TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y DRUM BASE ASS’Y 21 23 19 7 17 DF1-1566-000 DF1-1567-000 DF1-1569-000 DF1-1624-000 DF1-1628-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 BRAKE, T SUB LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y CVF LEVER ASS’Y 3 19 23 21 25 DF1-1630-000 DG1-3857-000 DG1-3858-000 DG1-3859-000 DG1-3860-000 000 000 000 000 000 B C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 LENS RING ASS’Y DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER REVIEW ARM ASS’Y GEAR, MODE 19 23 11 11 13 DG1-3861-000 DG1-3865-000 DG1-3978-000 DG1-4023-050 DG1-4024-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y FPC ASS’Y, SUB-DMC PCB ASS’Y, AUDIO PCB ASS’Y, LCD 15 15 17 11 9 DG1-4025-000 DG1-4026-000 DG1-4027-000 DG1-4028-000 DG1-4029-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 PCB PCB PCB PCB PCB 5-31 GRIP LCD TOP LCD BOTTOM LCD HOLDER U LCD HOLDER L ASS’Y, ASS’Y, ASS’Y, ASS’Y, ASS’Y, CCD CA CVF MULTI LITHIUM REMARKS NEW ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A PARTS LIST PAGE *1 *2 CLASS Q’TY 11 13 9 11 3 DG1-4051-000 DG1-4052-000 DG1-4054-000 DG1-4056-000 DG1-4062-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C B 1 1 1 1 1 FPC ASS’Y, JACK FPC ASS’Y, LCD SW FPC ASS’Y, FE MIC ASS’Y ZOOM SWITCH ASS’Y DESCRIPTION 13 15 17 7 5 DG1-4065-000 DG1-4066-000 DG1-4067-000 DG1-4078-000 DG1-4079-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C B C 1 1 1 1 1 HINGE ASS’Y, LCD LENS ASS’Y BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF) COVER ASS’Y, MMC BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y 3 5 7 7 9 DG1-4096-000 DG1-4097-000 DG1-4289-000 DG1-4290-000 DG1-4309-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B C C B 1 1 1 1 1 EYE PIECE ASS’Y RECORDER KEY ASS’Y PCB ASS’Y, MMC PCB ASS’Y, MMC MAIN DIAL ASS’Y 9 3 5 13 23 DG1-4312-000 DG1-4314-000 DG1-4316-000 DG1-7377-000 DH2-2115-000 000 000 000 000 000 B B B C C 1 1 1 1 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y REAR COVER ASS’Y RECORDER KEY ASS’Y BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (LCD) FPC, LOADING MOTOR 11 11 13 15 17 DH2-2174-000 DH2-2175-000 DH2-2177-000 DH2-2178-000 DH2-2179-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 FPC ASS’Y, MULTI-AUDIO FPC ASS’Y, SUB-MAIN FPC, LCD-MAIN FPC ASS’Y, CA-MAIN FPC ASS’Y, CVF-MAIN 11 5 7 21 13 DH2-2182-000 DH2-2183-000 DH2-4055-000 DH9-0812-000 DH9-0831-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 FPC ASS’Y, HA SHIELD FPC, BATTERY FPC, MMC-MAIN TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y LCD ASS’Y 15 21 21 21 23 DH9-0836-000 DS1-0169-000 DS1-0172-000 DS1-0173-000 DS1-0174-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 FILTER, SPRING, SPRING, SPRING, SPRING, IR COIL COIL COIL COIL 21 5,13 9 17 3 DS1-0175-000 DS1-5380-000 DS1-5385-000 DS1-5386-000 DS1-5387-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 2 1 1 1 SPRING, SPRING, SPRING, SPRING, SPRING, COIL COIL COIL COIL COIL 27 27 19 21 15 DY1-8119-000 DY1-8121-000 DY1-8210-000 DY1-8211-000 DY1-8271-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A) COVER, BATTERY MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y CCD ASS’Y 11 13 27 11 19 DY1-8273-000 DY1-8274-000 DY1-8276-000 DY1-8282-000 DY1-8283-000 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C E 1 1 1 1 1 PCB ASS’Y, SUB LCD ASS’Y COVER, TERMINAL BP-406 RECORDER UNIT DMC II DRUM ASS’Y (3CH) 11 11 27 DY1-8379-000 DY1-8381-000 DY1-8383-000 VS1-6307-014 VS1-6640-021 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 1 1 1 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN PCB ASS’Y, MAIN CARD, SD SDC-8M CONNECTOR, 14P CONNECTOR, 21P VS1-6640-025 VS1-6640-027 VS1-6640-031 VS1-6674-005 VS1-6674-006 000 000 000 000 000 C C C C C 1 4 1 1 1 CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, CONNECTOR, 5-32 25P 27P 31P 5P 6P REMARKS ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A NEW NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA20 MC A NEW ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A PARTS LIST PAGE CLASS Q’TY WC4-5155-000 WC5-5134-000 WD1-5062-000 WG2-5194-000 WS1-5524-000 PART NO. 000 000 000 000 000 C C D C C 1 1 2 1 1 SWITCH, TRIGGER SWITCH, DIAL FUSE LCD ASS’Y, CVF JACK, A/V 23,25 3 7 3,7,11,13 WS1-5879-000 XA1-7140-147 XA1-7140-207 XA1-7170-207 XA1-7170-257 000 000 000 000 000 C F F F F 1 5 2 5 15 CONNECTOR, DV SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW 3,5,7 3,7 3 7 5 XA1-7170-307 XA1-7170-357 XA1-7170-407 XA1-7170-607 XA1-7200-457 000 000 000 000 000 F F F F F 7 4 1 1 2 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW 7 17 17 3,13 15 XA4-9140-287 XA4-9170-309 XA4-9170-357 XA4-9170-359 XA4-9170-407 000 000 000 000 000 F F F F F 1 1 1 2 5 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW 13 5 15 5,7 3,7,11 XA4-9170-409 XA4-9170-457 XA4-9170-609 XA9-1000-000 XA9-1001-000 000 000 000 000 000 F F F F F 2 1 2 4 7 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW 7 7,9 11 3,11 9 XA9-1002-000 XA9-1004-000 XA9-1167-000 XA9-1244-000 XA9-1252-000 000 000 000 000 000 F F F F F 2 3 2 3 1 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW 11 7 15 23 15 XA9-1260-000 XA9-1274-000 XD1-1101-825 XD2-1100-102 YH7-0200-000 000 000 000 000 000 F F F C C 1 1 1 1 1 SCREW SCREW WASHER E RING MOTOR, PZ 15 15 YH7-0201-000 000 YH8-0097-000 000 C C 1 1 MOTOR, AF IG METER ASS’Y 17 DESCRIPTION 5-33 REMARKS CHAPTER 6. BLOCK DIAGRAMS CONTENTS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM BLOCK DIAGRAMS CAMERA SECTION-1 CAMERA SECTION-2 SYSCON SECTION SERVO SECTION AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION LCD SECTION INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A TEMP SENS ZOOM SENS CVF P.C.B. ZOOM MOTOR CN4101 30 31 CA P.C.B. CCD P.C.B. CN1000 LI P.C.B. 1 2 19 20 FOCUS MOTOR 2 2 1 20 19 2 LCD 1 ZOOM SW UNIT 1 CN1002 1 16 CN4102 FOCUS SENS LENS UNIT 21P CN1001 20P 20 21 BACK LIGHT 31P LCD MIC UNIT 16P 1 2 FN4101 IG METER 1 CN1 8 8P EJECT SW 25 CN11 24 1 2 1 2P CN15 2 EXP 4P CN13 1 4 CN12 SD CONNECTOR FOCUS 25P 1 10P 10P CN14 10 CN1402 6P CA R PLA D Y SD P.C.B. 6 SPEAKER R VC POWER 1 27 CN200 26 5P 1 2 CN102 5 1 31P 31 30 20P 1 2 21 CN1501 1 20 BACK LIGHT 2 20P OFF VIE CN1502 SD or MMC REC N CA P.SCARD MO 27P CN1401 LOADING MOTOR 5P FPC 5P 1 CN302 5 RU01 RECEIVER (REMOTE CONTROLLER) 2P 29 30 IC1601 PITCH SENSOR 4P MAIN DIAL DMC II Metal contact (Pins' face down) ( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS II ) 50 : MAIN CHASSIS 30P FPC SUB-DMC FPC U 33P 11P 1 51P 27P 39 2 1 11 1 2 25P CN301 CN101 MAIN DIAL 6 AUDIO P.C.B. IC2100 VIF2 IC2301 VIC2 25 24 1 CN801 1 40 11P FPC IC300 MOTOR DRIVE TP2002 SWP 1 CN2000 10P TP2001 PB-RF 26P 40P LCD P.C.B. 2 2 10 10P FPC 10P CN300 14P CN902 1 8 1 CN802 1 27 26 MAIN P.C.B. IC3202 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL 26P 2 27P 8P 1 13 14 CN3201 VIDEO HEAD 1 IC902 LCD DRIVER CN3302 2 26 1 27 IC203 SUB MI-COM 10 SLIDE CHASSIS 39 IC801 AIF SUB P.C.B. 1 Metal contact (Pins' face up) 40 CN701 IC100 MAIN MI-COM 27 26 IC1601 YAW SENSOR 6P CN3301 CN100 1 2 2 DRUM MOTOR MENU SW 51 1 2 40P IC4003 SIC IC1502 EVF DRIVER 1 CN303 33 IC1101 DIC4 IC1401 CAMERA MI-COM IC4001 V53 27 26 CN304 R-KEY UNIT CN1301 1 2 19 20 1 2 26P 6 CN901 1 CN903 26 6P IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL WP4201 10P WP4202 8P 10P FPC CN92 CN93 1 : 8 1 MULTI P.C.B. JACK FPC BATTERY TERMINAL 10 14 DC JACK CN91 15 1 28 28P Metal contact LCD UNIT HALL IC Metal contact AV JACK DUCKING UNIT REMOTE MIC 10P 01 Sep. 2001 C CANON INC. 2001 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM LI P.C.B. CN1 1 GND 2 GND 3 LI 3V 4 START/STOP SW 5 PAE/GREEN 6 MO5V 7 VTR POWER LED 8 CAM POWER LED BT1 1 LI+ BT2 1 LI GND CCD P.C.B. CN1000 1 CCD OUT 2 V2B 3 GND 4 V2A 5 H2 6 V3B 7 H1 8 V3A 9 +15V 10 V1 11 RG 12 V4 13 GND 14 GND 15 -7.5V 16 SUB 17 NC 18 NC 19 NC 20 NC CA P.C.B. CN1001 1 V2B 2 CCD OUT 3 V2A 4 GND 5 V3B 6 H2 7 V3A 8 H1 9 V1 10 +15V 11 V4 12 RG 13 GND 14 GND 15 SUB 16 -7.5V 17 NC 18 NC 19 NC 20 NC CN1002 1 GND 2 GND 3 GND 4 CAM 4.7V 5 CAM 3V 6 CAM 3V 7 36M 8 +15V 9 -7.5V 10 TG NP SEL 11 XTG SEN 12 VGATE 13 HD 14 VD 15 FID 16 XTG RST 17 DSPCLK 18 CAM SCLK 19 CAM SDO 20 XAGC CS 21 D9 22 D8 23 D7 24 D6 25 D5 26 D4 27 D3 28 D2 29 D1 30 D0 31 D0 CVF P.C.B. CN4101 1 GND 2 GND 3 BL 5V 4 BL 5V 5 COM 6 G 7 R 8 B 9 BLK 10 HCK1 11 HCK2 12 HST 13 RGT 14 DWN 15 EN 16 STB 17 VCK 18 VST 19 VSS 20 VDD 21 VDD CN4102 1 VDD 2 VSS 3 VST 4 VCK 5 TEST2 (STB) 6 EN 7 TEST1 (DWN) 8 RGT 9 HST 10 HCK2 11 HCK1 12 BLK 13 B 14 R 15 G 16 COM FN4101 1 BL 5V 2 LED MMC P.C.B. CN11 1 MMC RSV 2 MMC CMD 3 GND 4 MMC VDD 5 MMC CLK 6 CARD DET 7 MMC DAT 8 LAC OUT 9 GND 10 GND 11 SP + 12 SP 13 PAE/GREEN 14 START/STOP SW 15 MAIN SW0 16 MAIN SW1 17 MAIN SW2 18 AD KEY2 19 CARD PR0 20 MO 5V 21 VTR POWER LED 22 LANC DC 23 CAM POWER LED 24 LI 3V 25 LI 3V CN12 1 MMC RSV 2 MMC CMD 3 GND 4 MMC VDD 5 MMC CLK 6 GND 7 MMC DAT 8 MMC DAT1 9 MMC DAT2 10 CARD PRO 11 GND 12 CARD DET CN13 1 MAIN SW1 2 MAIN SW2 3 GND 4 MAIN SW0 CN14 1 CAM POWER LED 2 VTR POWER LED 3 MO 5V 4 PAE/GREEN 5 START/STOP SW 6 LI 3V 7 GND 8 GND 9 EXP 10 FOCUS CN15 1 SP 2 SP + SUB P.C.B. CN300 1 MIC1 2 MIC2 3 C IN 4 MIC3 5 GND 6 REC PRF 7 TR C 8 TR LED A 9 TR LED K 10 TR E CN301 1 W 2 W 3 COIL COM 4 GND 5 SENS COM 6 DPG 7 DFG 8 V 9 V 10 U 11 U CN302 1 LOAD (+) 2 LOAD (-) 3 NC 4 GND 5 DEW CN303 1 W 2 W 3 V 4 V 5 SR LED K 6 SR LED A 7 SR C 8 SR E 9 GND 10 CFG2 11 GND 12 CFG1 13 CFG VCC 14 BOT E 15 B EOT C 16 EOT E 17 MSW SENS 18 MSW VCC 19 MSW VSS 20 LED K 21 LED A 22 GND 23 W+ 24 W25 H26 U 27 U 28 GND 29 H+ 30 V+ 31 V32 U+ 33 UCN304 1 DEW 2 GND 3 GND 4 MIC ON 5 MIC3 6 MIC2 7 MIC1 8 LMO CONT 9 UNLOAD 10 LOAD 11 DVDD 3V 12 DVDD 3V 13 DA SREEL 14 MO 5V 15 VTR UNREG 16 CAS IN 17 DPG 18 DFG 19 DRUM ON 20 DRUM VS 21 DRUM VS 22 REEL LED CONT 23 S REEL FG 24 T REEL FG 25 SELECSLP 26 TAPE LED 27 CAP FWO 28 CAP VS 29 CAP VS 30 CFG 31 CAP ON 32 DA CFG 33 REC PROOF 34 TAPE END 35 TAPE TOP 36 GND 37 GND 38 MSW AD 39 TALLY LED 40 RMC IN 41 DVDD 4.7V 42 GND 43 I SW 44 Y OFFSET 45 Y GYRO 46 CAM GND 47 CAM GND 48 P OFFSET 49 P GYRO 50 CAM 3V 51 CAM 3V MAIN P.C.B. CN100 1 CAN 3V 2 P GYRO 3 P OFFSET 4 GND 5 GND 6 Y GYRO 7 Y OFFSET 8 I SW 9 GND 10 DVDD 4.7V 11 RMC IN 12 TALLY LED 13 MSW AD 14 GND 15 GND 16 TAPE TOP 17 TAPE END 18 REC PROOF 19 DA CFG 20 CAP ON 21 CFG 22 CAP VS 23 CAP VS 24 CAP FWD 25 TAPE LED 26 SELCSLP 27 SELCSLP CN101 1 T REEL FG 2 S REEL FG 3 REEL LED CONT 4 DRUM VS 5 DRUM VS 6 DRUM ON 7 DFG 8 DPG 9 CAS IN 10 VTR UNREG 11 MO 5V 12 DA SPEEL 13 DVDD 3V 14 DVDD 3V 15 LOAD 16 UNLOAD 17 LMO CONT 18 MIC1 19 MIC2 20 MIC3 21 MIC ON 22 GND 23 GND 24 DEW 25 DEW CN102 1 AD KEY1 2 DVDD 3V 3 AD KEY0 4 NC 5 GND CN200 1 LI 3V 2 CAM POWER LED 3 LANC DC 4 VTR POWER LED 5 MO 5V 6 CARD PRO 7 AD KEY2 8 MAIN SW2 9 MAIN SW1 10 MAIN SW0 11 START/STOP SW 12 PAE/GREEN 13 SP 14 SP + 15 GND 16 GND 17 LANC OUT 18 MMC DAT 19 MMC VSS2 20 MMC CLK 21 MMC VDD 22 GND 23 MMC CMD 24 MMC RSV 25 GND 26 EJECT SW 27 EJECT SW CN1301 1 DRIVE (-) 2 HALL OUT (-) 3 ZOOM B 4 HALL IN (-) 5 ZOOM A 6 HALL OUT (+) 7 ZOOM-A 8 HALL IN (+) 9 ZOOM-B 10 DRIVE (+) 11 TM SENS 12 FOCUS LED 13 ZOOM SENS 14 FOCUS A 15 ZOOM LED 16 FOCUS-A 17 VCC 18 FOCUS-B 19 FOCUS SENS 20 FOCUS B CN1401 1 PHOTO 2 GND 3 H PHOTO 4 GND 5 ZOOM AD 6 CK 3V ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MAIN P.C.B. CN1402 1 D0 2 D1 3 D2 4 D3 5 D4 6 D5 7 D6 8 D7 9 D8 10 D9 11 XAGC CS 12 CAM SDO 13 CAM SCLK 14 DSPCLK 15 XTG RST 16 FID 17 VD 18 HD 19 VGATE 20 XTG SEN 21 TG NP SEL 22 CCD -7.5V 23 CCD 15V 24 36M 25 CAM 3V 26 CAM 3V 27 CAM 4.7V 28 GND 29 GND 30 GND 31 GND CN1501 1 VDD 2 VSS 3 VST 4 VCK 5 STB 6 EN 7 DWN 8 RGT 9 HST 10 HCK2 11 HCK1 12 BLK 13 B 14 R 15 G 16 COM 17 BL 5V 18 BL 5V 19 GND 20 GND 21 NC CN1502 1 GND 2 GND 3 GND 4 LCD UNREG 5 LCD UNREG 6 LCD UNREG 7 LCD 3V 8 LCD 3V 9 PLL ADJ 10 COM ADJ 11 LCD 12V 12 LCD BL ON 13 LCD ON 14 PNL BT SW 15 PNL OPEN SW 16 LCD CEN 17 LCD EEP CS 18 SIN1 19 SOUT1 20 SCLK1 21 C SYNC 22 GND 23 GND 24 PANEL B 25 PANEL G 26 PANEL R 27 NC CN2000 1 HA GND 2 H1A 3 H1B 4 HA GND 5 H2A 6 H2B 7 HA GND 8 H3A 9 H3B 10 HA GND CN3201 1 BATT 2 BATT 3 BATT 4 BATT 5 BATT 6 BATT 7 BATT INFO AD 8 BATT E3 9 BATT + 10 BATT + 11 BATT + 12 BATT + 13 BATT + 14 BATT + MAIN P.C.B. CN3301 1 GND 2 GND 3 GND 4 GND 5 AUDIO R 6 AUDIO L 7 A 3V 8 A 3V 9 GND 10 GND 11 AUD I 12 GND 13 AMCLK 14 AUD O 15 LRCK 16 WCK 17 GND 18 GND 19 GND 20 GND 21 SP 22 SP + 23 VTR UNREG 24 VTR UNREG 25 SCLK2 26 SOUT2 27 DVDD 3V 28 AIF CS 29 A EMP1 30 XPD DA 31 BEEP LEV 32 SHUTTER 1 33 BEEP 2 34 BEEP 1 35 XPD AD 36 A MUTE 37 AUD ON 38 A EMP2 39 DVDD 4.7V 40 EXT CONT CN3302 1 XTPA 2 XTPB 3 TPB 4 TPA 5 GND 6 GND 7 AUDIO R 8 GND 9 GND 10 GND 11 AUDIO L 12 GND 13 PLUG IN 14 V I/O 15 GND 16 GND 17 Y I/O 18 GND 19 GND 20 C I/O 21 S DET 22 EXT DET 23 HP DET 24 GND 25 LANC DC 26 LANC OUT 27 NC AUDIO P.C.B. CN701 1 GND 2 Lch 3 Rch 4 GND 5 Cch 6 GND CN801 1 GND 2 GND 3 GND 4 GND 5 AUDIO R 6 AUDIO L 7 A 3V 8 A 3V 9 GND 10 GND 11 AUD I 12 GND 13 AMCLK 14 AUD O 15 LACK 16 WCK 17 GND 18 GND 19 GND 20 GND 21 SP 22 SP + 23 VTR UNREG 24 VTR UNREG 25 SCLK2 26 SOUT2 27 DVDD3V 28 AIF CS 29 A EMP1 30 XPD DA 31 BEEP LEV 32 SHUTTER1 33 BEEP2 34 BEEP1 35 XPD AD 36 A MUTE 37 AUD ON 38 A EMP2 39 DVDD4.7V 40 EXT CONT CN802 1 M GND 2 M Lch 3 M Rch 4 M GND 5 M GND 6 HP COM 7 HP Lch 8 HP Rch MULTI P.C.B. CN91 1 GND 2 EXT MIC L 3 EXT MIC R 4 GND 5 GND 6 HP COM 7 HP L 8 HP R 9 GND 10 GND 11 GND 12 GND 13 GND 14 GND 15 LANC OUT 16 LANC DC 17 GND 18 HP DET 19 EXT DET 20 S DET 21 C I/O 22 GND 23 Y I/O 24 GND 25 GND 26 GND 27 GND 28 GND CN92 1 GND 2 EXT MIC L 3 EXT MIC R 4 GND 5 GND 6 HP COM 7 HP L 8 HP R C93 1 LANC OUT 2 LANC DC 3 GND 4 HP DET 5 EXT DET 6 S DET 7 C I/O 8 GND 9 Y I/O 10 GND LCD P.C.B. CN901 1 PNL BT SW 2 V GND 3 LCD 3V 4 PNL OPEN SW 5 V GND 6 LCD 3V CN902 1 PANEL R 2 PANEL G 3 PANEL B 4 GND 5 GND 6 C SYNC 7 SCLK1 8 SOUT1 9 SIN1 10 LCD EEP CS 11 LCD CEN 12 PNL OPEN SW 13 PNL BT SW 14 LCD ON 15 LCD BL DN 16 LCD 12V 17 COM ADJ 18 PLL ADJ 19 LCD 3V 20 LCD 3V 21 LCD UNREG 22 LCD UNREG 23 LCD UNREG 24 GND 25 GND 26 GND 27 NC CN903 1 NC 2 CKH1 3 CKH2 4 PCG 5 XPCG 6 HVDD 7 STH 8 XSTH 9 HVSS 10 CSH 11 G 12 R 13 B 14 PCD 15 NC 16 CSV 17 VVDD 18 ENB 19 XENB 20 VVSS 21 STV 22 XSTV 23 CKV1 24 CKV2 25 COM 26 NC CAMERA SECTION-1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A DATA COMMUNICATION CA P.C.B. CAM 4.7V 1 V3A 4 V3B V4 3 7 H1 14 H2 15 RG 10 1 16 10 4 2 8 6 12 7 5 11 9 15 2 15 9 3 1 7 5 11 8 6 12 10 16 VDD 12 VL 26 CCD OUT VSUB V1 V2A V2B V3A V3B V4 H1 H2 RG +15V -7.5V CDS DVDD AVDD D0 D1 D3 A/D D4 D5 D6 CONTROL D7 D8 D9 CS SCLK CCD -7.5V CCD +15V 9 AGC 19 18 20 17 23 16 SDATA CAM3V 2 +15V -7.5V 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 43 44 SCK 45 SDO 18 17 21 15 34 SHD SHP PBLK OBP CLPDM CAM 3V CCD P.C.B. 47 SUB TEMP SENSOR 41 V2A ZOOM RESET NTSC/PAL 36 TIMING GENERATOR SCK SSI 33 SDO RST CKI 13 H2 1/2 AVD1 AVD2 VDD2 VDD1 VH VL RG DSGATE 12 H1 9 4 14 16 48 24 42 45 FOCUS MOTOR IG METER MCKO TG NP SEL XTG SEN V GATE HD VD FID 4 5 6 8 9 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 7 17 10 11 12 13 14 15 XTG RST 16 TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. CN1402 1 4 7 2 5 3 6 3 25 C1042,R1031 6 CAM 3V 7 5 Vcc -7.5V +15V CAM 3V FOCUS RESET FID SSCK 34 CONTROL 40 V4 CCD VD FID 27 5 Vcc 2 HD VDI 28 IC1008 CAM 4.7V TC7SET08FU 8 Vcc 1 V GATE HDI 29 44 V3A 46 V3B XTG SEN V GATE 30 43 V2B ZOOM MOTOR IC1006 TC7WH08FU TG NP SEL SEN 32 IC1001 CXD2488AR TIMING GENERATOR 39 V1 CAM 4.7V CAM 3V CAM 3V +15V -7.5V D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 XAGC CS SDO SCK CLK 36M DSPCLK 46 CCD OUT ADCK V2B CCD OUT VSUB V1 V2A V2B V3A V3B V4 H1 H2 RG +15V -7.5V DUMC 2 15 D2 OBP 6 31 CN1001 PB IC1000 ICX250AQ CCD V1 V2A CN1000 SHP SUB 16 AVDD IC1003 HD49325BHF CDS/AGC/AD 8 SHD VOUT 41 AVDD Q1000 Q1001 DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL CN1002 CAM 3V 38 DVDD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL LPF 6 CAM 4.7V CAM 4.7V 5 Vcc 14 Vcc 12 1 2 VCO 3 1 4 4 5 2 PD IC1009 TC7SH08FU 4 IC1005 TLC2933IPW IC1007 TC7SET08FU MAIN P.C.B. TM SENS IRIS GAIN LED RET I ENC Q1302 TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. IC1401 IC1404 MB88347LPFV D/A CONVERTER (EVR) Q1302 CAM 3V CN1301 10 DRIVE(+) 17 VCC 11 TM SENS 15 ZOOM LED 12 FOCUS LED 4 HALL IN(-) 8 HALL IN(+) 1 DRIVE(-) 2 HALL OUT(-) 6 HALL OUT(+) 5 ZOOM A 7 ZOOM-A 3 ZOOM B 9 ZOOM-B 14 FOCUS A 16 FOCUS-A FOCUS B 20 18 FOCUS-B 19 FOCUS SENS 13 ZOOM SENS CAM 3V 13 - + 12 + IC1302 (2/3) IC1302 (3/3) 10 OFFSET2 3 4 IE1 5 5 IE2 6 6 OFFSET CAM 3V 7 DRIVE - 7 ZOOM-B FOCUS A FOCUS-A FOCUS B FOCUS-B D3V 8 LD 12 SCK 13 DA LOAD D1 14 SCK TAD SDO2 FROM CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. IC1401 CAM 3V TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. IC1401 ZOOM B 9 + Vcc 4 1.5V F RST Z RST A3V + IC1302 LMV324MT OPE AMP (1/3) 10 IC1303 (2/2) ZOOM-A Sep. 2001 - 5 Q1301 ZOOM A 01 8 6 7 - 14 9 2 - 1 5 VDD 24 OUT3A IN3 13 19 OUT3B IN4 15 7 OUT4A 17 OUT4B 2 OUT1A IN1 IC1304 mPD16877MA MOTOR DRIVE 9 IN2 11 EN1 10 CAM 3V ZA ZB FA FB F PSB EN2 12 23 OUT1B 4 OUT2A 21 OUT2B EN3 14 Z PSB IC1303 NJM3414AV OPE AMP (1/2) - 1 2 + Vcc 8 3 CAM 3V TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. IC1105 FROM CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. IC1104 FROM CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. IC1401 EN4 16 VM1 1 VM4 8 MO 5V C CANON INC. 2001 CAMERA SECTION-2 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL DATA COMMUNICATION MAIN P.C.B. VCXO 36MHz 141 PD 27 HD IC1101 F722504D DIC 4 20 VD 26 FI 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 31 AA 49 A0 48 16 CAS VDD IC1102 MB81F161622C SDRAM 15 WE VDD 25 VDDQ 38 164 CHD A2 ADATA3 165 CHD A3 ADATA4 166 CHD A4 ADATA5 167 CHD A5 ADATA6 168 CHD A6 ADATA7 169 CHD A7 VDDQ 50 14 LDQM 36 UDQM BDATA0 132 CHD B0 BDATA1 133 CHD B1 BDATA2 134 CHD N2 BDATA3 135 CHD N3 BDATA4 136 CHD B4 BDATA5 137 CHD B5 BDATA6 138 CHD B6 87 VICCLK 175 176 177 180 165 86 164 3 9 10 CH1 OUT4 97 ADATA4 BDATA7 140 CHD B7 CH1 OUT5 98 ADATA5 CH1 OUT6 99 ADATA6 CH1 OUT7 100 ADATA7 C to M CAM SCK 11 TG NP SEL M to C DATA 85 M to C 15 XAGC CS C to D DATA 94 143 XVD CAM SCK CAM SDO BDATA3 BDATA4 SIC TO M CH2 5 107 BDATA5 M TO SIC SIC SCK CH2 6 110 BDATA6 CH2 7 111 BDATA7 Q103 22 F PSB TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. F MODE 0 169 96 DIC2S CS F MODE 4 170 95 DIC2S I/F CONT TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. CN1301-13,19pin 14 DA LOAD VD OUT 41 152 DIC2S VD SIC CS 14 164 MCL KEN RESEVE 1 149 RESERVE 1 153 DIC XSYSRST RESEVE 2 78 RESERVE 2 5 RESEVE 3 159 97 CAM/DIC/SIC SCK F MODE 2 174 SO 4 98 SDI0 SCK 2 SIC RESET 10 52 CAM RX Q102 54 CAM SS TMG1 55 CAM SS TMG2 CPU D(11) CXD12 62 CPU D(12) 173 SB SCK 27 TDO SIC PSB T RST 151 CHV A0 ELURA10 A DM-MV4 E DM-MV4i E ONLY 152 CHV A1 153 CHV A2 154 CHV A3 SIC BBUSSEL 155 CHV A4 SIC RESET 157 CHV A5 158 CHV A6 159 CHV A7 141 CHV B0 142 CHV B1 MMC ON 146 CHV B5 MMC DET 196 MMC DET 147 CHV B6 CARD PRO 197 CARD PRO 148 CHV B7 PHOTO SW 56 W PHOTO 7 1 100 120 124 150 180 3 Y GYRO P GYRO I SW VCCR VCC PLL VCC OCS VCC VCC 5 VCC NT XPL SEL RESET Vcc T IC1602 ENC 03JB YAW SENSOR 6 3 CAM 2.3V CN304 CN100 CAM 3V Y GYRO P GYRO I SW (PAL) 51 50 45 49 43 1 6 2 8 CAM 3V CAM 3V Y GYRO P GYRO I SW IC1601 ENC 03JA PITCH SENSOR IC1605 TC75W51FU OPE AMP CAM 3V 3 Vcc 2 184 183 CAM 3V (NTSC) 1 1 CAM 3V 1 VC 2 4 OUT VC 2 ZOOM SW UNIT TO VIDEO SECTION (MAIN P.C.B.) 5 2 4 OUT IN 5 X1401 20MHz CAM 2.3V DVDD 3V IC1402 PST596JNR RESET DIC 1.7V +15V 7.5V CARD 3V CAM ON CAM 3V CAM 2.3V DVDD 3V DIC 1.7V +15V -7.5V CARD 3V IC1603(2/2) MMC FROM SS SECTION (MAIN P.C.B.) SUB P.C.B.(1/2) 12 4 1 7 2 5 10 CN12 CARD DET CN11 CARD DET MMC VDD MMC RSV MMC DAT MMC CMD MC CLK CARD PRO MMC VDD MMC RSV MMC DAT MMC CMD MC CLK CARD PRO 6 4 1 7 2 5 19 CPU A(3) CXA04 32 CPU A(4) CXA05 33 CPU A(5) CPU A(6) CPU A(7) 40 VDD4 CXA08 44 CPU A(8) 54 VDD5 CXA09 45 CPU A(9) SHUTTER1 27M TCK VIC TDO TMS T RST ADATA0 ADATA1 ADATA2 ADATA3 ADATA4 ADATA5 ADATA6 ADATA7 BDATA0 BDATA1 BDATA2 BDATA3 BDATA4 BDATA5 BDATA6 BDATA7 VIC VD 19 21 24 18 23 20 6 CN200 MMC VSS2 MMC VDD MMC RSV MMC DAT MMC CMD MC CLK CARD PRO CXA10 46 CXA11 47 CXA12 56 CXA13 57 CXA14 58 CXA15 59 CPU A(10) CPU A(11) CPU A(12) CPU A(13) CPU A(14) CPU A(15) 112 VDD13 CXA16 60 CPU A(16) 121 VDD14 CXA17 61 CPU A(17) 130 VDD15 CXA18 72 CPU A(18) CXA19 73 CPU A(19) IC4003 KS4MOU1298MBP SIC 38 2 CPU D(0) DQ1 3 CPU D(1) DQ2 5 CPU D(2) DQ3 6 CPU D(3) DQ4 8 CPU D(4) DQ5 9 CPU D(5) DQ6 11 CPU D(6) DQ7 12 CPU D(7) DQ8 39 CPU D(8) DQ9 40 CPU D(9) DQ10 42 CPU D(10) DQ11 43 CPU D(11) DQ12 45 CPU D(12) DQ13 46 CPU D(13) DQ14 48 CPU D(14) DQ15 49 CPU D(15) 13 25 1 26 XCE 28 XOE 11 XWE IC4000 MBM29LV800BA 8MFLASH CPU A(1) 25 A0 CPU A(2) 24 A1 CPU A(3) 23 A2 VCC 37 CPU A(4) 22 A3 DQ0 29 CPU D(0) CPU A(5) 21 A4 DQ1 31 CPU D(1) CPU A(6) 20 A5 DQ2 33 CPU D(2) CPU A(7) 19 A6 DQ3 35 CPU D(3) CPU A(8) 18 A7 DQ4 38 CPU D(4) CPU A(9) 8 A8 DQ5 40 CPU D(5) CPU A(10) 7 A9 DQ6 42 CPU D(6) CPU A(11) 6 A10 DQ7 44 CPU D(7) CPU A(12) 5 A11 DQ8 30 CPU D(8) CPU A(13) 4 A12 DQ9 32 CPU D(9) CPU A(14) 3 A13 DQ10 34 CPU D(10) CPU A(15) 2 A14 DQ11 36 CPU D(11) CPU A(16) 1 A15 DQ12 39 CPU D(12) CPU A(17) 48 A16 DQ13 41 CPU D(13) CPU A(18) 17 A17 DQ14 43 CPU D(14) CPU A(20) 16 A18 DQ15 45 CPU D(15) CPU A(0) 91 A0 CPU A(1) 92 A1 CPU A(2) 93 A2 CPU A(3) 94 A3 CPU A(4) 97 A4 CPU A(5) 98 A5 CPU A(6) 99 A6 CPU A(7) 100 A7 CPU A(8) 101 A8 CARD 3V CPU A(9) 102 A9 CPU A(10) 104 A10 CPU A(11) 105 A11 CPU A(12) 106 A12 CPU A(13) 107 A13 CPU A(14) 109 A14 CPU A(15) 110 A15 CPU A(16) 111 A16 CPU A(17) 112 A17 CPU A(18) 113 A18 CPU A(19) 114 A19 CPU A(20) 117 A20 IC4001 UPD70236AGC V53 D0 71 CPU D(0) D1 72 CPU D(1) D2 74 CPU D(2) D3 75 CPU D(3) D4 76 CPU D(4) D5 77 CPU D(5) D6 79 CPU D(6) D7 80 CPU D(7) D8 81 CPU D(8) D9 82 CPU D(9) D10 83 CPU D(10) D11 84 CPU D(11) D12 87 CPU D(12) D13 88 CPU D(13) D14 89 CPU D(14) D15 90 CPU D(15) DVDD 68 VDD8 BCYST 5 61 BCYST VDD 18 131 VDD16 CPUCKI 6 46 CLKOUT VDD 48 139 VDD17 DSTB 7 62 XDSTB VDD 66 156 VDD18 HLDAK 9 CARD 3V Q4002 176 VDD19 Q4003 12 HLDAK VDD 78 MXIO 10 55 M/XIO VDD 86 RXW 11 56 R/XW VDD 96 UBE 12 64 XUBE VDD 108 3 VDD 118 JPHACK 13 Q4000 CARD 3V 118 MC DT 117 MC CMO 116 MC CLK XDMAAKO JPHRD 14 58 XIORD JPHWR 15 57 XIOWR 17 INTP3 QINT 20 6 3 CPU A(2) CXA03 31 CXA07 43 CAM 3V CAM 3V CPU A(1) CXA02 30 CXA06 42 107 VDD12 CAM 3V ZOOM AD H PHOTO PHOTO 6 5 3 1 ZOOM 8 Vcc CAM 3V 118 10 2 4 OUT 1 7 123 X OUT 121 X IN 2 CXA01 29 VDD1 1 CAM 3V CN1401 Vcc CPU A(0) 21 VDD3 98 VDD11 Vcc CXA00 28 CARD 3V HALF PHOTO SW 57 1 CPU D(15) FMWE 76 90 VDD10 CAM 3V CPU D(14) FMOE 75 82 VDD9 IC1603(1/2) TC7W66FU SWITCH CPU D(13) CXD15 65 26 TRST 44 DQ0 CARD 3V CXD14 64 FMCE 74 MMC ON 13 CAM 3V CXD13 63 25 TMS 67 VDD7 33 EEP RB IC1403 AK6416AM EEPROM 24 TDI 66 VDD6 CAM 3V 31 XEEP CS Sep. 2001 SIC REQ CPU D(0) CXD11 53 SIC SCK 145 CHV B4 154 CAM CS 8 CS 1 35 CLK CPU D(10) 174 SB SDI 198 CAM DIC RST M to C CAM SCK C to M SHUTTER1 72 32 X EEP WP 34 CKE CXD10 52 M TO SIC 143 CHV B2 CAM SS TMG2 131 WP 6 DRMXCKE 102 CPU D(9) IC100 (2/3) M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B ELURA10 A DM-IXY DV2 DM-MV4 E ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4i E DM-MV4i MC E 97 SCLK0 R/B 7 01 RESERVE 3 SIC PSB 12 4 25 Z RES SW 99 SDO0 14 LDQM CPU D(8) 161 SB SD0 SIC CS SIC REQ 148 99 CAM/DIC/SIC SO 24 F RES SW SI 3 DRMDQML 100 CXD09 51 SIC TO M TMS CAM SS TMG1 132 187 I ENC 36 UDQM CPU D(7) CAM REQ 145 CAM CS 36 DRMDQMU 97 CPU D(6) SIC TDO 53 DIC2S FI 156 CAM REQ 21 LED RET 15 /WE CXD08 50 VIC TDO FI OUT 85 FIC CS 40 CAM RX 38 DRWL 101 CXD07 49 16 X IN 23 TCK 98 CAM/SIC SI 20 IRIS GAIN 17 /RAS CPU D(5) CAM DIC RST 27 189 TM SENS RAS 96 CXD06 48 DIC READ 42 IC1401 M31011MB CAMERA MI-COM 16 /CAS CXD05 39 PWM CS 41 23 Z PSB CAS 95 175 SB SE ZOOM KEY 188 TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. IC1304 19 A11 172 RESET1 TCK 136 CAM M RST 82 SDO2 DRM A(11) CPU D(4) 27M DIC CS 39 80 SCLK2 DRM A(11) CPU D(3) Q104 DIC SCLK 92 XTG RST DRMX A11 92 CXD04 38 BDATA2 D to C DATA 93 43 FID 13 20 A10 CXD03 37 CH2 2 104 32 A9 DRM A(10) 171 BBUSSEL SIC CS DRM A(9) 31 A8 DRM A(10) 170 PW SAVE SIC RESET DRM A(8) IC4002 MB81F161622C SDRAM DRMX A10 89 SIC PSB BDATA1 CH2 4 106 DRM A(9) SIC BBUSSEL BDATA0 CH2 3 105 DRM A(8) CPU D(2) 144 CHV B3 M to C SCLK 84 DRMX A08 87 CXD02 36 MAIN MI-COM C to M DATA 86 30 A7 160 SB REQ DIC4 RST DET 37 12 XTG SEN DRM A(7) SIC REQ CH2 1 103 109 16 V GATE DRM A(7) CPU D(1) TCK 105 TMS AVCC DIC TDI VCCP VCCP VCCB VCCP 88 101 130 140 157 182 104 VCCP VCCP VCCB VCCB VCCB VCCV1 TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. IC1404-13,14pin 56 DRMX A07 86 CXD01 35 CH2 0 102 SIC TDO TMS TCK 48 29 A6 125 GP3 RESERVE 3 DM-IXY DV2 ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4i MC E ONLY CAM 3V 34 DRM A(6) CXD00 34 Q101 16 DRM A(6) 124 GP2 SIC BBUSSEL 11 6 28 A5 DRMX A06 85 RESERVE 2 F MODE 1 172 READ XCE 3 XCE 2 XCE 1 SCK SDO SDI JTAGTDI JTAGTCK IC1104 TC7WH08FK 27 A4 DRM A(5) ADATA3 XSYSRST 159 JTAGTDO 5 24 A3 DRM A(4) DRM A(5) CH1 OUT3 95 MCL KEN 3 JTAGTMS FB 72 MCLK DRM A(3) DRM A(4) DRMX A05 84 DRMXCLK 103 1 6 DRM A(3) DRMX A04 81 120 GP1 82 PWM ZB 7 DRMX A03 80 RESERVE 1 3 79 PWM FB 23 A2 ADATA2 80 PWM ZA 2 DRM A(2) CH1 OUT2 94 6 Vcc DRM A(2) ADATA1 76 PWM FA FA 22 A1 DRMX A02 79 CH1 OUT1 93 2 8 21 A0 DRM A(1) DRMX A09 88 VDDQ 44 35 CLK DVDD3V 1 ADATA2 DRM A(0) DRM A(1) ADATA0 7 5 46 DRM A(0) DRMX A01 78 CH1 OUT0 92 8 ZB 45 DRMX A00 77 VDD IC1106,X1101 1 43 VDD S7 168 C1112,R1117 C1113,R1118 ZA 42 VDD S6 157 77 TGCLK Vcc 40 VDD S5 126 40 ADIN9 CAM 3V 39 VDD S4 101 39 ADIN8 IC1105 TC7WH08FK 155 VDD S1 33 38 ADIN7 LPF 17 RAS DQM 17 37 ADIN6 CAM SDO CAM SCK 152 FM CLK 113 35 ADIN5 12 18 CS MEM CNT3 156 34 ADIN4 11 163 CHD A1 VDDQ IC1301 TK11140S REGULATER 9 162 CHD A0 ADATA1 VDD 32 ADIN3 8 ADATA0 VDDQ 4 31 ADIN2 5 1 6 DVDD 3V MEM CNT0 151 30 ADIN1 5 DQ15 A0 29 ADIN0 3 DQ0 XTG RST MO 5V M0 F 15 +15V -7.5V 2 137 138 139 140 142 143 144 145 147 148 149 114 115 116 117 119 120 121 122 124 125 127 128 129 130 131 132 AA TG NP SEL XTG SEN V GATE HD VD FID CAM 3V M00 CAM 4.7V CAM 3V CAM 3V +15V -7.5V D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 XAGC CS CAM SDO CAM SCK CLK 36M DSPCLK 27 26 25 23 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 24 14 21 20 19 18 17 16 VDDQ DM-IXY DV2 ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4i MC E ONLY CN1402 TO CAMERA SECTION-1 CA P.C.B. CN1002 JPHREQ 115 2 RESETO 111 51 XRESET READY 110 40 XREADY HLDRQ 109 11 HLDRQ DMARQO CPUMCK 106 49 X1 CONIRQ 105 17 INTP3 BS16 104 42 XBS8/BS16 Q4001 19 VIC VD MMC P.C.B.(1/2) C CANON INC. 2001 SYSCON SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A MAIN P.C.B. VTR UNREG IC3203 TK71548S 4.7V REGULATOR CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL SW F 21 Q3202 REGULATOR 6 LPF 5 MO 5V 4 1 3 5 7 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 6 5 4 3 2 1 BATT BATT BATT BATT 2 3 IC3219 TK1128S 2.8V REGULATOR FU2302 1 4 36 2 3 Q3216 REGULATOR 6 CH2 1 4 + - 2 3 5 4 1 9 FU2301 2 28 VCC DVDD 3V LPF A 3V 3 LPF LCD 3V 3 LPF LPF Q3201 SW CH4 4 DIAL CW 5 2 DIC 1.7V LPF DVDD 1.7V 2 Q3203 REGULATOR 6 ON/OFF 30 5 4 1 56 AVDD 2.3V LPF DVDD 2.3V LPF CAM 2.3V Q3206 REGULATOR 6 IC801 AUDIO INTERFACE D VS 5 4 SCK IC2100 VIF 2 DERR 64 2 DERR 174 PWMD CERR 151 PWMC DIF 3V VCC AVDD 2.3V VCC DVDD 3V VCC Q3207 REGULATOR 6 CH6 SCK 4 SI 1 SO 4 1 SUB CS 3 SUB REQ 7 SCLK2 8 SIN2 9 SOUT2 BATT AD 42 RMC PULSE IN OSC ON/OFF Q3209 IC3202 AN8049FHN DC/DC COVETOR CONTROL OUT 1 REG. SW6 SW3 LPF LCD 12V Q3210 10 Q3208 OUT 2 Q3213 L3217 2 IC201 AK5440BH EEPROM MIC ON 30 MIC3 37 MIC SCL 10 MIC2 38 LANC PW CONT MIC SDA 11 E3V DETECT 8 LPF CCD 15V Q3210 14 Q202 DATA CONT LIMITER 5.6V REG ON/OFF 13 16 X IN 10 REG. LPF CCD -7.5V IC202 TL 1596CPW LANC INTERFACE CN102 AD KEY1 AD KEY0 DVDD 3V 8 MAIN SW 2 24 MAIN SW 0 26 3 22 3V REG LITHIUM 3V 5 CAM PW LED 28 13 XCIN ON/OFF SW RESET VTR PW LED 27 X202 4MHz 3V REG 6 MAIN SW 1 25 X201 32.768KHz 1 3 2 VOLTAGE DETECT EJECT SW 21 1 SW102 MENU Q201 RESET 15 17 XOUT 14 XCOUT 1 3 2 IC200 VTR UNREG S 8423RFS E3V REG. & RESET E 3V VCC 43 4 1 2 Q3211 Q3214 L3218 4 VREF 44 7 VTR UNREG Q202 CAM ON OUT 3 IC203 M37516M4 SUB MI-COM 12 11 Q3212 L3216 REG. 11 4 VCC 14 VCC 3 SW2 DI 3 DO 4 MIC1 39 4 SW5 XCK 2 E 3V R KEY FPC SW1 5 GND LI3 DET 23 Q204 16 SW4 6 RESET TALLY LED 29 47 LCD BL ON 3 8 VCC VTR UNREG CAS IN 20 34 REC CTL 19 STOP DVDD 3V BATT INFO AD 41 31 EVF BL ON 6 DVDD 3V DFG 153 DPG 130 CFG 132 46 LCD ON 21 CN1 AD KEY1 AD KEY0 DVDD 3V VTR UNREG MO 5V XCS 1 CERR 2 T REEL FG S REEL FG 2 Q207 VOLTAGE DETECT CAM PW LED 3 MO 5V Q207 VTR PW LED CN200 PAE/GREEN START/STOP SW AD KEY 2 MO 5V LI 3V CAM PW LED VTR PW LED EJECT SW 12 11 7 5 1 2 4 10 9 8 26 27 CN3302 LANC DC LANC OUT 25 26 MAIN SW 0 MAIN SW 1 MAIN SW 2 EJECT SW DVDD 3V REW FF DE ON/OFF REC.P Sep. 2001 TO SERVO SECTION SUB P.C.B. (2/2) CN304 DVDD 3.0V C VS 5 RFGT 191 RFGS 172 IC2301 MBG102 VIC2 (AV SECTION) 3 PW CONT TO CAMERA SECTION 100 150 180 4 5 6 8 7 17 16 15 LOAD 2 S REEL TG 1 T REEL TG DEW 24 25 DEW 9 CAS IN REEL LED CONT 3 MIC ON 21 MIC 3 20 MIC 2 19 MIC 1 18 DA S REEL 12 VTR UNREG 10 MO 5V 11 DVDD 3V 13 DVDD 3V 14 SO 11 CAM 3V CAM 2.3V DVDD 3V DIC 1.7V + 15V - 7.5V CARD 3V VCCB 1 48 VTR ON CAM 3V CAM 2.3V DVDD 3V DIC 1.7V + 15V - 7.5V CARD 3V VCCB IC101 S-80928AMP 6 01 SOUT1 94 81 LONC IN 3 1 CH5 PLAY/ PAUSE OSDC/EEPROM/DA SO 93 DVDD 2.3V 16 10 OSDC/EEPROM/DA SCK 92 82 LANC OUT Q3227 TO AV SECTION 86 AIF/VIF/SUB SO 118 RESET IN 1 DPG DFG MAIN EEPROM CS 91 Q3227 2 15 85 SUB SI DVDD 3V LPF DRUM VS PAE/GREEN SW 59 START/STOP 58 3 CH3 29 RESET CN101 DRUM VS DRUM VS DRUM ON DPG DFG LMO CONT UNLOAD KEY AD2 186 84 AIF/VIF/SUB SCK SO 3 MSW AD TAPE LED TAPE END TAPE TOP DA CFG Q105 SWITCH 10 11 12 22 23 20 18 24 26 27 21 13 25 17 16 19 T REEL FG 190 147 SUB CS SI CN100 DVDD 4.7V RMC IN TALLY LED CAP VS CAP VS CAP ON REC PROOF CAP FWD SEL CSLP SELCSLP CFG S REEL FG 189 146 SUB REQ SCK LPF CAP VS TAPE END A/D 192 187 KEY AD3 Q3205 33 DIF 3V DVDD 3V DVDD 4.7V HA 3V HA 4.7V A 3V AVDD 2.3V LCD 12V LCD 3V DVDD 1.7V E 3V VTR UNREG REEL LED CONT 176 TAPE TOP A/D 191 EXECUTE 57 DIF 3V DVDD 3V DVDD 4.7V HA 3V HA 4.7V A 3V AVDD 2.3V LCD 12V LCD 3V DVDD 1.7V E 3V VTR UNREG LCD ON LCD BL ON EVF BL ON REC CTL DA CFG DA S REEL TAPE LED 172 185 KEY AD1 CAM 3V 4 1 DVDD 4.7V DEW DETECT 183 184 KEY AD0 64 DIAL CW SW CAM ON Q3204 REGULATOR 6 165 65 DIAL CCW SW 5 19 166 CPG DIAL CCW CARD 3V LPF 42 VCC 168 REC PROOF SW 63 1 6 63 VCC 175 CASSETTE IN SW 62 2 51 VCC BATTERY PACK HA 3V LPF 137 CAM PW ON SW101 14 VCC BATT BATT BATT LPF 171 MSW A/D 193 MENU DIAL 50 VCC X100 20MHz DIF 3V LANC ON + B D - E 3V IN OUT 4 ON 1 CAP ON 169 IC100 (1/3) CAP FWD M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B SELCSLP DM-IXY DV2 ELURA10 A LMO CONT ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4 E DM-MV4i MC E DM-MV4i E UNLOAD MAIN MI-COM LOAD 2 46 CN3201 BATT INFO BATT E3 BATT + BATT + BATT + BATT + BATT + VCCB DRUM ON 174 123 X OUT 1 CH1 DSC 6 3 39 SW F 16 VCCB 121 X IN 34 VCCB DVDD 4.7V 66 130 48 VCCP LPF VCCP IN OUT 2 VCCP 1 VCCP IC3201 MB3825APFF DC/DC CONVERTOR CONTROL 182 157 140 101 88 VCCP DRUM SERVO SIGNAL DVDD 3V HA 4.7V AVCC DATA COMMUNICATION C TO SERVO SECTION MMC P.C.B. (2/3) CN11 EJECT TO SERVO SECTION MULTI P.C.B. (1/2) CN93 CANON INC. 2001 SERVO SECTION DRUM SERVO SIGNAL ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A SUB P.C.B. (2/2) CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL DMC II IC300 LB1190W MOTOR DRIVE DVS U 59 V U,V,W, DRIVER 60 IC301 S 81256GPU 5.6V REGULATOR 58 W 56 COM 23 VCC2 41 DRUM ON TO SYSCON SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN100 TO SYSCON SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN101 CN304 DVDD 4.7V RMC IN TALLY LED CAP VS CAP VS CAP ON REC PROOF 41 40 39 29 28 31 33 27 CAP FWD 25 SELCSLP 30 CFG MSW AD 38 26 TAPE LED 34 TAPE END 35 TAPE TOP 32 DA CFG 21 DRUM VS 20 DRUM VS 19 DRUM ON 17 DPG 18 DFG 8 LMO CONT 9 UNLOAD 10 LOAD 23 S REEL TG 24 T REEL TG 1 DEW 16 CAS IN 22 REEL LED CONT 4 MIC ON 5 MIC 3 6 MIC 2 7 MIC 1 13 DA S REEL 15 VTR UNREG 14 MO 5V 12 DVDD 3V 11 DVDD 3V CVS DVDD 4.7V 16 POWER SW TIMING CONT 28 PG AMP 35 PG AMP DPG DPG U 22 VCC1 2 VTR UNREG UV+ FWD/RVS SW V- DRUM VS 12 SELCSLP W+ DPG DFG WH+ 64 HALL POWER Q300 HCFG2 11 10 9 8 2 1 3 6 7 5 CN303 U U V V W W U+ UV+ VW+ WH+ HC FG1 C FG2 SR LED A SR LED K SR E SR C B&EOT C EOT E BOT E LED A LED K MSW VSS MSW VCC MSW SENS 7 8 30 31 32 33 2 1 4 3 11 10 5 9 22 24 28 29 26 27 19 18 20 13 14 15 16 17 PG FG 32 50 49 48 DVDD 3.0V 47 DVDD 3V 46 45 DVDD 3V 42 Q304 Q302 43 DVDD 3V 37 CAPSTAN MOTOR FG S-REEL Q306 36 CFG1 VCC 38 5 3 LODDECORDER DRIVER MO 5V LOD+ MODE SW POW 5V DVDD 3V VTR UNREG DVDD 3V 61 CN302 LOAD (+) LOAD (-) DEW LOD (+) LOD (-) 63 10 9 DVDD 3V DRUM MOTOR 30 51 U+ 4 3 53 W U.V.W. DRIVER DVDD 3V IN 55 V POWER SW CFG 40 OUT V REG 31 44 DVDD 3.0V CAP VS 3 POSITION DETECT CN301 U U V V W W COIL COM DPG DFG SENS COM 1 2 5 LOADING MOTOR 11 Q307 7 8 6 Q307 DVDD 3V Q305 EOT DET MICON CN300 TR E TR C TR LED A TR LED K REC PRF C IN MIC3 MIC2 MIC1 DEW SENSOR 1 4 3 2 5 8 7 9 10 BOT DET T-REEL Q301 DVDD 3V Q303 SWITCH RU01 DVDD 4.7V REMOTE CONTROLER 2 SAFETY SW 3 LED 01 DVDD 3V MIC CASSETTE IN SW MULTI P.C.B.(1/2) TO SYSCON SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN3302 2 1 CN93 LANC DC LANC OUT CN91 LANC DC LANC OUT 16 15 SW2 FOCUS TO SYSCON SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN200 LI P.C.B. TO DOCKING UNIT CN11 13 PAE/GREEN 14 START/STP SW AD KEY 2 18 MO 5V 20 LI 3V 24 LI 3V 25 23 CAM PW LED 21 VTR PW LED 15 MAIN SW 0 16 MAIN SW 1 MAIN SW 2 17 CN14 PAE/GREEN START/STOP SW FOCUS EXP MO 5V LI 3V CAM PW LED VTR PW LED 4 5 10 9 3 6 1 2 CN13 MAIN SW 0 MAIN SW 1 MAIN SW 2 4 1 2 PAE/GREEN EXP CN1 5 PAE/GREEN 4 START/STOP SW MO 5V 6 LI 3V 3 8 CAM PW LED 7 VTR PW LED SW1 START/STOP MO 5V LITHIUM BATTERY POWER MAIN DIAL MO 5V MMC P.C.B.(2/3) 01 Sep. 2001 C CANON INC. 2001 AUDIO SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A DATA COMMUNICATION MULTI P.C.B. (2/2) ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL JACK FPC CN3401 ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL CN91 DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL DV SIGNAL TO DOCKING UNIT 23 21 20 19 18 8 2 7 3 6 DV TERMINAL CN93 Y I/O C I/O S DET EXT DET HP DET HP R EXT MIC L HP L EXT MIC R HP COM Y I/O C I/O S DET EXT DET HP DET 9 7 6 5 4 CN92 HP R EXT MIC L HP L EXT MIC R HP COM 8 2 7 3 6 1 AUDIO L 2 TO VIDEO SECTION MAIN P.C.B. (2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION) CN3302 VIDEO 3 4 DET 5 AUDIO R 6 AUDIO P.C.B. Q855 HPF A 4.7V 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 58 A 3V 55 VCC VCC VREFL 6 ON INT A/D ALC 12 + ALC OFF MIC INT SERIAL I/O 15 14 LINE ALC MIC + - ON 4 LPF MUTE MASTER CLOCK PB LPF 49 - EVR MATRIX 8 50 REC IC802 PCM3006 A/D, D/A CONVERTER 9 DE-EMP0 18 DE-EMP1 17 28 29 2 1 64 63 62 61 60 EVR 48 6 HPF 7 47 5 42 Q856 7 8 39 6 5 TO VIDEO SECTION MAIN P.C.B. (2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION) CN3301 11 14 40 35 15 16 30 13 29 38 26 25 28 31 LRCK WCK XPD DA A M CLK A EMP 1 A EMP 2 S OUT 2 S CLK 2 AIF CS BEEP LEVEL BEEP 1 BEEP 2 SHUTTER 1 A MUTE SP + SP VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 11 D/A + 3 10 19 20 PB MUTE IC801 LA74200W AUDIO INTERFACE INT INT 52 REC WIND CUT OFF EXT LPF ALC OFF EXT 6 DVDD 4.7V 3 OFF WIND CUT EXT REF CN801 A 3V A 3V DVDD 4.7V AUDIO L AUDIO R AUD I AUD O EXT CONT XPD AD 7 A 3V LINE 13 IC701(2/2) NJM4580E BUFFER 53 + 11 REF EXT - CN802 HP R EXT MIC L HP L EXT MIC R HP COM VDD EXT CONT LPF - 8 2 7 3 6 A 3V SP 5V 23 34 33 32 36 22 21 23 24 Q803 Q804 Q805 BEEP LEVEL 51 Q812,Q813 Q814,Q815 25 MUTE 2 56 1 Q808,Q809,Q810,Q811 3 32 IC701(1/2) NJM4580E L.P.F. L R R BUZZER SHUTTER DVDD 4.7V MUTE IC803 Q851 MUTE MUTE 46 5V REGURATOR MUTE MUTE MUTE 27 30 L MUTE HP COM + 5V AV DATA 39 LOGIC CONTROL AV CLK 41 AIF CS 44 Q801 Q802 38 43 DVDD 4.7V 5V MUTE OFF DELAY MICUNIT CN701 L C 4 2 5 MIC L MIC R MIC C P-ON/OFF MUTE Q852,Q853,Q854 R 01 Sep. 2001 C CANON INC. 2001 VIDEO SECTION DATA COMMUNICATION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A DIGITAL (VIDEO + AUDIO) SIGNAL DV SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL MAIN P.C.B.(2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION) IC1503 MC74HC4053 SWITCH AVDD 2.3V 19 VD CSYNCO 169 VF R 14 VF G 98 CG R 16 14 DSP CHARA 13 DSP FRAME CG G 17 B VF B 35 DVDD 3V HD 29 OSDI0 55 68 VD CLAMP C 11 20 26 31 TDI 134 X2302 27MHz 1 8 32 37 45 HA 4.7V 47 12 13 SO 14 VCLK 0 96 VRH 2 53 VRL 2 31 VRLSW 105 TMS EADDR 4 99 110 TRST 107 A DATA 7 E DATA 0 BRIGHT OSD B TIMING GENERATOR LOGIC 3 HA 4.7V 72 DVDD HA 2 5 36 108 DVDD HA 3 UTIL7 133 32 RDAT 214 35 38 REC ON REC CONT 152 DVDD HA 5 IC100(3/3) M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B DM-IXY DV2 ELURA10 A ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4 E DM-MV4i MC E DM-MV4i E MAIN MI-COM 4 IC2000 LD502W VRP2 46 43 XRDAT 235 34 PB H 213 1 66 21 VCK 68 VST 11 22 SCLK1 SOUT1 CN1501 R G B COM BLK HCK 1 HCK 2 HST RGT TEST1(DWN) EN TEST2(STB) VCK VST VDD BL 5V BL 5V XECSV LCD 12V XECSI 9 42 HA 4.7V H2A H2B PANEL IC CS 87 PANEL EEPROM CS 90 PB ON OSDC CS EVF SEV 80 EVF SEN EVF DA LOAD 83 21 15 VCO HI LCD EEP CS OSDC CS 127 SDL 248 AUD 1 O LCD CEN MAIN EEPROM CS 91 EVF DA LOAD MAIN EEP CS 229 LRCK OSDC/EEPROM/DA SCK 92 SCLK1 247 WCK OSDC/EEPRO VI/DA SO 94 SOUT1 8 9 4 SOUT1 14 DI SCLK1 13 CLK EVF DA LOAD 12 LD IC1501 MB88347PFV D/A CONVERTER Q1502 COM 5 PLL 2 DA CFG 15 SW F 3 GCA 207 AMCK PBRF 245 EPH 17 GDL EEPROM SI 93 EQ VCO X2302 24.576MHz XPD AD 71 194 RAGC SWP 237 210 IXO A EMP2 73 2 AIF/VIF/SUB SCK AIF/VIF/SUB SO VIF CS AIF CS 47 LINE IN 139 LET CONT 46 WIDE CONT 72 A MUTE 196 WIDE DET 77 BUZAER CARRIER1 76 BUZAER CARRIER1 BEEP LEDEL 9 68 EXT CONT 163 PLUG IN 162 S DET 161 EXT DET 160 HP DET 23 XRCLK 22 RCLK 26 RAFC 25 RAPC 8 RAGC 28 AQAC 12 EQ CONT 2 11 EQ CONT 1 13 GDL CONT 30 GDH CONT 1 29 GDH CONT 2 UTIL0 UTIL3 UTIL2 UTIL5 UTIL4 UTIL1 GDH CONT 2 GDH CONT 1 GDL CONT EQ CONT 1 AQAC RAGC RAPC RAFC RCLK XRCLK EQ CONT 2 RAGC 91 123 208 219 224 246 225 240 201 234 156 183 180 200 222 178 RAPC 70 UTIL6 59 RCLK 28 XRCLK DVDD L8 DVDD L7 DVDD L6 DVDD L4 DVDD L5 DVDD L3 A EMP1 74 VTR UNREG SIN1 84 86 2 67 DIF3V DVDD3V DVDD4.7V HA3V HA4.7V A3V AVDD2.3V LCD12V S0 SCK BEEP1 BEEP2 VTR UNREG E3V DVDD1.7V MMC P.C.B.(3/3) 1 2 01 12 11 MEIN EEP CS SCLK1 13 14 Sep. 2001 FROM SS SECTION (MAIN P.C.B) DA CFG DA SREEL LCD ON LCD BL ON EVF BL ON REC CTL DIF3V DVDD3V DVDD4.7V HA3V HA4.7V A3V AVDD2.3V LCD12V LCD3V VTR UNREG E3V DVDD1.7V XPD DA 70 209 IXI LCD3V CN11 SP SP + TO LCD-CVF SECTION CVF P.C.B. CN4101 H1B 227 AUD 1 I DVDD 1.7V CN15 SP SP + 14 15 13 16 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 17 18 H1A 217 DVDD HA 11 SDLSEL 154 46 FNB Q1503 176 DVDD HA 8 238 DVDD HA 12 65 TST9 MO 5V 45 196 DVDD HA 10 64 RGT EVFSEN 175 DVDD HA 7 194 DVDD HA 9 62 TST17 67 45 VIC XEWR 129 DVDD HA 4 61 HST 44 VIC XERD 24 DVDD HA 1 42 HCK2 18 XRESET 1 4 32 60 26 E DATA 15 4 204 DVDD HD 11 LINE IN 43 CG MIX TO LCD-CVF SECTION LCD P.C.B. CN902 36 HCK1 27 2 REC H 193 DVDD L2 TO AUDIO SECTION AUDIO P.C.B. CN801 E ADDR 6 OSD G 14 15 21 26 25 24 20 19 17 16 18 10 9 8 7 11 13 12 6 5 34 BLK 28 5 63 DVDD HC 1 DVDD L1 34 33 32 36 22 21 23 24 19 57 OSD R COM 29 173 DVDD HA 6 LRCK WCK XPD DA A M CLK A EMP 1 A EMP 2 S OUT 2 S CLK 2 AIF CS BEEP LEVEL BEEP 1 BEEP 2 SHUTTER 1 A MUTE SP + SP VTR UNREG VTR UNREG REF 30 HA 3V 40 35 15 16 30 13 29 38 26 25 28 31 G OUT CHROMA 31 249 DVDD HD 12 11 14 R OUT CLAMP B/B-Y 32 XECSI 125 165 DVDD HC 2 59 B 33 XEWR 126 71 DVDD HB 2 58 G 36 E 3V 51 DVDD HB 1 R 37 XERD 115 DVDD 3V LETTER CONT 70 CONTRAST 38 XECSV 112 VIF 4.7V Q2106 20 E ADDR 0 39 XRESET 146 48 VCLK CN3301 A 3V A 3V DVDD 4.7V AUDIO L AUDIO R AUD I AUD O EXT CONT XPD AD 55 Q1508 B Q1501 40 E DATA 15 105 44 B DATA 7 7 8 39 6 5 G/Y 41 E DATA 14 83 127 B DATA 5 WIDE CONT 71 19 42 E DATA 13 120 148 B DATA 4 DVDD4.7V A3V 8 20 E DATA 12 119 86 B DATA 6 Q2103 G MIRR 63 IC1502 CXA3503R EVF DRIVER PANEL OPEN SW 60 21 E DATA 11 103 43 B DATA 3 DVDD 4.7V 37 PANEL BOTTOH/TOP SW 61 22 E DATA 9 100 170 B DATA 2 WIDE DET 41 23 E DATA 10 84 85 B DATA 1 HA 4.7V R/R-Y 24 E DATA 8 82 128 B DATA 0 Q2301 72 LPF 25 E DATA 7 121 IC2301 MBG102 VIC2 190 A DATA 6 Q2105 5 Q1507 R LCD 3V 103 TDI E DATA 6 101 64 A DATA 5 Q2104 MM TD0 E DATA 5 62 109 A DATA 4 Q2100 EADDR 3 38 E DATA 4 61 106 A DATA 3 Q2101 109 TCK E DATA 3 81 46 A DATA 2 75W 143 XINT M E DATA 2 60 111 A DATA 1 Q2102 145 XINT C EADDR 2 140 E DATA 1 40 149 A DATA 0 75W EADDR 0 16 EADDR 1 141 E DATA 0 19 147 XTPB 75W 144 XINT D EADDR 6 18 167 TPB SO 128 OSDC RESET DVDD 3V TDO 179 EADDR 5 104 189 XTPA SCK LCD 12V B OUT 188 TPA IC203 SUB MI-COM (SS SECTION) VDD 5 TRST 159 VCC 7 VTR UNREG 2 TMS 182 3 15 LCD 12V CKI CS LCD 3V LCD 3V CKO SERIAL DATA CLK DATA VCLK 1 VCC 16 VCC 7 3 IC2600 BU2991 CHARACTER GENERATOR 4 Q1504 4 4 TCK 181 19 25 XINTO M 39 B LCP RL 17 9 5 SEN 34 30 XINTO C 79 15 1 B SOUT 1 3 2 16 SDAT 27 IC2601 S.75V04ANC INVERTER XINTO D 118 97 C 0 OSDC CS VCC 74 Y 0 2 OSC 8 DOTCLK 17 LUMINANCE CHROMINANCE CS G VDD 33 C IN 21 C CONT SCLK1 RESET BPF CLAMP 10 G 1 DATA OSDI1 114 B CLK 10 VDD 90 CLAMP Y 40 14 13 SCK Y/C SEP Q1505 12 VCC1 Y CONT R G 14 CLAMP 46 CG B 18 VDD 5 R R VDD2 73 Y IN 36 20 HD 15 LPF R G CN1502 PNL BT SW PNL OPEN SW C SYNC PANEL R PANEL G PANEL B SCLK1 SOUT1 LCD EEP CS LCD CEN SIN1 COM ADJ PLL ADJ LCD 3V LCD 3V LCD 12V LCD ON LCD BL ON LCD UNREG LCD UNREG LCD UNREG 11 VDD EQ CG FRAME 15 VCC3 VDD PLL 2 AVDD D2 VDD PLL 1 AVDD C 4 AVDD D1 78 144 243 244 116 93 AVDD A5 77 AVDD A4 76 AVDD A3 75 AVDD A2 AVDD A1 CSNC 1 AVDD B3 9 2 27MHz 54 GCA TCK VIC TDO TMS TRST SHUTTER 1 A DATA 0 A DATA 1 A DATA 2 A DATA 3 A DATA 4 A DATA 5 A DATA 6 A DATA 7 B DATA 0 B DATA 1 B DATA 2 B DATA 3 B DATA 4 B DATA 5 B DATA 6 B DATA 7 27M FROM CAMERA SECTION MAIN P.C.B. C SYNC SEP CLAMP 48 VIF CS TO AUDIO SECTION MULTI P.C.B. (2/2) CN93 TP A TP B XTP B XTP A V I/O PLUG IN Y I/O C I/O S DET HP DET EXT DET AUDIO R AUDIO L SCK 4 3 2 1 14 13 17 20 21 23 22 7 11 AVDD B2 IC2100 LD502U VIF2 CN3302 TO AUDIO SECTION JACK FPC AVDD B1 184 185 186 CSYNC DIF 3V SOUT1 SIN1 CN200 SP SP + C DRUM UNIT TO SS SECTION IC201-1-4(EEPROM) CN2000 H1A H1B H2A H2B 2 3 CH-1 HEAD CH-2 HEAD 5 6 CANON INC. 2001 LCD-CVF SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A DATA COMMUNICATION LCD P.C.B. 58 TO VIDEO SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN1502 CN902 13 PNL BT SW 12 PNL OPEN SW 6 C SYNC PANEL R 1 PANEL G 2 PANEL B 3 SCLK1 7 SOUT1 8 10 LCD EEP CS LCD CEN 11 SIN1 9 COM ADJ 17 PLL ADJ 18 LCD 3V 19 LCD 3V 20 LCD 12V 16 LCD ON 14 LCD BL ON 15 21 LCD UNREG 22 LCD UNREG 23 LCD UNREG CLAMP 45 Q902 60 G OUT G CLAMP AGC CNTRST GAMMA S/H BRIGHT 43 B OUT B CLAMP 40 GCA CSYNC 62 Q903 L CS CLK SO LCD 3V 10 12 11 CS 50 XSTH CLK S I/F D1 CONTROL SHT CKH 2 51 30 3V CKH 1 VSY/I PLL PCG 2 Q904 PCG 1 12V TIMING GENERATOR XSTV STV Q902 CKV 2 PD IC901 AK6420AM EEPROM LCD UNREG IC902 LV4135W LCD DRIVE OSC LCD 12V DO 3 4 SO SO 5 VCC1 DI CLK VDD2 2 7 39 9 14 49 8 CKV 1 KENB ENB CSYO VDD1 GND SK E CS VC CPCD 5 VCC 1 OSC/I 8 CS OSC/O LCD 3V 1 3 4 6 CN903 VR VG VB VCOM HVDD VVDD XSTH SHT CKH 2 CKH 1 PCG 2 PCG 1 XSTV STV CKV 2 CKV 1 KENB ENB CSYO CSHO 12 11 13 25 6 17 8 7 3 2 5 4 22 21 24 23 19 18 16 10 GCA 59 CLK SO E CS CEN SI LCD 3V R OUT R CN901 PNL BT SW LCD 3V PNL OPEN SW LCD 3V CSHO 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 12V 29 30 34 35 LCD UNIT PD PLL ADJ 4 10 ON/OFF FB LCD UNREG PLL T4201 CPU9D25 WP4201 LCD UNREG 4 INPWM OUT + IC4201 AN8016NSH VCC DC/DC CONVERTER PNL OPEN SW PNL BT SW OPEN Hi(OFF) Hi(OFF) CLOSE LO(ON) Hi(OFF) INVERT Hi(OFF) LO(ON) INVERT CLOSE LO(ON) LO(ON) LCD 12V 3V 7 3 1 HALL IC (PANEL SIDE) MAGNET (MAIN BODY SIDE) BACK LIGHT 2 6 Q4203 SWITCH 5 LCD 3V 5 WP4202 1 6 Q4202 DRIVER Q4204 DRIVER CVF P.C.B. FN 4101 BL 5V LED TO VIDEO SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN1501 01 3 4 7 6 8 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 CN4101 BL 5V BL 5V R G B COM BLK HCK 1 HCK 2 HST RGT TEST1(DWN) EN TEST2(STB) VCK VST VDD Sep. 2001 Q4101 LED DRIVE 1 2 BACK LIGHT Q4103 LED DRIVE CVF PANEL CN4102 COM R G B BLK HCK 1 HCK 2 HST RGT TEST1(DWN) EN TEST2(STB) VCK VST VDD 16 14 15 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 C CANON INC. 2001
